|
2
|
1 |
%%
|
|
|
2 |
%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a
|
|
|
3 |
%%
|
|
|
4 |
%%
|
|
|
5 |
%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of
|
|
|
6 |
%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
|
|
|
7 |
%% conferences.
|
|
|
8 |
%%
|
|
|
9 |
%% Support sites:
|
|
|
10 |
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
|
|
|
11 |
%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
|
|
|
12 |
%% and
|
|
|
13 |
%% http://www.ieee.org/
|
|
|
14 |
%%
|
|
|
15 |
%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
|
|
|
16 |
%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
|
|
|
17 |
%%
|
|
|
18 |
%%
|
|
|
19 |
%% Contributors:
|
|
|
20 |
%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
|
|
|
21 |
%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
|
|
|
22 |
%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)
|
|
|
23 |
%%
|
|
|
24 |
%%
|
|
|
25 |
%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi,
|
|
|
26 |
%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
|
|
|
27 |
%% Juergen von Hagen
|
|
|
28 |
%% and
|
|
|
29 |
%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell
|
|
|
30 |
%%
|
|
|
31 |
%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell
|
|
|
32 |
%% See:
|
|
|
33 |
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
|
|
|
34 |
%% for current contact information.
|
|
|
35 |
%%
|
|
|
36 |
%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
|
|
|
37 |
%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command
|
|
|
38 |
%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package.
|
|
|
39 |
%%
|
|
|
40 |
%%*************************************************************************
|
|
|
41 |
%% Legal Notice:
|
|
|
42 |
%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
|
|
|
43 |
%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
|
|
|
44 |
%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
|
|
|
45 |
%% User assumes all risk.
|
|
|
46 |
%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
|
|
|
47 |
%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
|
|
|
48 |
%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
|
|
|
49 |
%% of any information contained here.
|
|
|
50 |
%%
|
|
|
51 |
%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
|
|
|
52 |
%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
|
|
|
53 |
%%
|
|
|
54 |
%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
|
|
|
55 |
%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
|
|
|
56 |
%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
|
|
|
57 |
%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
|
|
|
58 |
%% 2003/12/01 or later.
|
|
|
59 |
%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
|
|
|
60 |
%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
|
|
|
61 |
%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
|
|
|
62 |
%%
|
|
|
63 |
%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
|
|
|
64 |
%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
|
|
|
65 |
%%
|
|
|
66 |
%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an
|
|
|
67 |
%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will
|
|
|
68 |
%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
|
|
|
69 |
%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
|
|
|
70 |
%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
|
|
|
71 |
%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
|
|
|
72 |
%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
|
|
|
73 |
%% correct version information.
|
|
|
74 |
%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
|
|
|
75 |
%%*************************************************************************
|
|
|
76 |
%%
|
|
|
77 |
%
|
|
|
78 |
% Available class options
|
|
|
79 |
% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran}
|
|
|
80 |
%
|
|
|
81 |
% *** choose only one from each category ***
|
|
|
82 |
%
|
|
|
83 |
% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
|
|
|
84 |
% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
|
|
|
85 |
%
|
|
|
86 |
% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
|
|
|
87 |
% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
|
|
|
88 |
% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
|
|
|
89 |
% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
|
|
|
90 |
% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
|
|
|
91 |
% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
|
|
|
92 |
% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
|
|
|
93 |
% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
|
|
|
94 |
% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
|
|
|
95 |
% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
|
|
|
96 |
% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
|
|
|
97 |
% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
|
|
|
98 |
% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
|
|
|
99 |
% information can be easily seen on the cover page.
|
|
|
100 |
% The default is journal.
|
|
|
101 |
%
|
|
|
102 |
% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
|
|
|
103 |
% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
|
|
|
104 |
% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
|
|
|
105 |
% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
|
|
|
106 |
% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
|
|
|
107 |
% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
|
|
|
108 |
% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
|
|
|
109 |
% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
|
|
|
110 |
% also want to select onecolumn.
|
|
|
111 |
% The default is final.
|
|
|
112 |
%
|
|
|
113 |
% letterpaper, a4paper
|
|
|
114 |
% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
|
|
|
115 |
% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
|
|
|
116 |
% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
|
|
|
117 |
% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
|
|
|
118 |
% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
|
|
|
119 |
% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
|
|
|
120 |
% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
|
|
|
121 |
% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing
|
|
|
122 |
% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
|
|
|
123 |
% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
|
|
|
124 |
% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex
|
|
|
125 |
% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
|
|
|
126 |
% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
|
|
|
127 |
% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
|
|
|
128 |
% testflow documentation
|
|
|
129 |
% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
|
|
|
130 |
% for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
|
|
|
131 |
% The default is letterpaper.
|
|
|
132 |
%
|
|
|
133 |
% oneside, twoside
|
|
|
134 |
% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
|
|
|
135 |
% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
|
|
|
136 |
% the pages.
|
|
|
137 |
% The default is oneside.
|
|
|
138 |
%
|
|
|
139 |
% onecolumn, twocolumn
|
|
|
140 |
% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
|
|
|
141 |
% column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
|
|
|
142 |
% The default is twocolumn.
|
|
|
143 |
%
|
|
|
144 |
% compsoc
|
|
|
145 |
% Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.
|
|
|
146 |
%
|
|
|
147 |
% compsocconf
|
|
|
148 |
% Use the format of IEEE Computer Society conferencs (CPS)
|
|
|
149 |
%
|
|
|
150 |
% romanappendices
|
|
|
151 |
% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
|
|
|
152 |
% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
|
|
|
153 |
% v1.6b and earlier did.
|
|
|
154 |
%
|
|
|
155 |
% captionsoff
|
|
|
156 |
% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
|
|
|
157 |
% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
|
|
|
158 |
% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
|
|
|
159 |
% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
|
|
|
160 |
%
|
|
|
161 |
% nofonttune
|
|
|
162 |
% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
|
|
|
163 |
% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
|
|
|
164 |
% their fonts.
|
|
|
165 |
% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
|
|
|
166 |
%
|
|
|
167 |
%
|
|
|
168 |
%----------
|
|
|
169 |
% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
|
|
|
170 |
% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
|
|
|
171 |
% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
|
|
|
172 |
% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
|
|
|
173 |
% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
|
|
|
174 |
% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
|
|
|
175 |
%
|
|
|
176 |
% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
|
|
|
177 |
% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional)
|
|
|
178 |
% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro)
|
|
|
179 |
% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro)
|
|
|
180 |
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length)
|
|
|
181 |
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
|
|
|
182 |
%
|
|
|
183 |
% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
|
|
|
184 |
% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
|
|
|
185 |
% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
|
|
|
186 |
% point size options provided as a single macro:
|
|
|
187 |
% \CLASSOPTIONpt
|
|
|
188 |
% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
|
|
|
189 |
% normalsize point size.
|
|
|
190 |
% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
|
|
|
191 |
% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
|
|
|
192 |
|
|
|
193 |
|
|
|
194 |
|
|
|
195 |
|
|
|
196 |
|
|
|
197 |
\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell]
|
|
|
198 |
\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
|
|
|
199 |
\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
|
|
|
200 |
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
|
|
|
201 |
|
|
|
202 |
% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
|
|
|
203 |
% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
|
|
|
204 |
% determine if the new features are provided.
|
|
|
205 |
% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from
|
|
|
206 |
% these values. i.e., V1.4
|
|
|
207 |
% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
|
|
|
208 |
% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
|
|
|
209 |
\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
|
|
|
210 |
\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}
|
|
|
211 |
|
|
|
212 |
% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
|
|
|
213 |
\newif\if@restonecol
|
|
|
214 |
\newif\if@titlepage
|
|
|
215 |
|
|
|
216 |
|
|
|
217 |
% class option conditionals
|
|
|
218 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
|
|
|
219 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
|
|
|
220 |
|
|
|
221 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
|
|
|
222 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
|
|
|
223 |
|
|
|
224 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
|
|
|
225 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
|
|
|
226 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
|
|
|
227 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
|
|
|
228 |
|
|
|
229 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
|
|
|
230 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
|
|
231 |
|
|
|
232 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
|
|
|
233 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
|
|
|
234 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
|
|
|
235 |
|
|
|
236 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
|
|
|
237 |
|
|
|
238 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
|
|
|
239 |
|
|
|
240 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
|
|
|
241 |
|
|
|
242 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf \CLASSOPTIONcompsocconffalse
|
|
|
243 |
|
|
|
244 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
|
|
|
245 |
|
|
|
246 |
|
|
|
247 |
% class info conditionals
|
|
|
248 |
|
|
|
249 |
% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
|
|
|
250 |
\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse
|
|
|
251 |
|
|
|
252 |
|
|
|
253 |
% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
|
|
|
254 |
\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
|
|
255 |
|
|
|
256 |
|
|
|
257 |
|
|
|
258 |
% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
|
|
|
259 |
% dimen
|
|
|
260 |
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
|
|
261 |
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
|
|
262 |
% count
|
|
|
263 |
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
|
|
|
264 |
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
|
|
265 |
% token list
|
|
|
266 |
\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
|
|
267 |
|
|
|
268 |
% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
|
|
|
269 |
% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
|
|
|
270 |
% external packages
|
|
|
271 |
\def\@ptsize{0}
|
|
|
272 |
% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
|
|
|
273 |
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
|
|
|
274 |
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
|
|
|
275 |
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
|
|
|
276 |
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
|
|
|
277 |
|
|
|
278 |
|
|
|
279 |
|
|
|
280 |
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
|
|
|
281 |
\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
|
|
|
282 |
\@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
|
|
283 |
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
|
|
|
284 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
|
|
|
285 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
|
|
|
286 |
|
|
|
287 |
|
|
|
288 |
\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
|
|
|
289 |
\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
|
|
|
290 |
\@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
|
|
|
291 |
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
|
|
|
292 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
|
|
|
293 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
|
|
|
294 |
|
|
|
295 |
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
|
|
|
296 |
\CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
|
|
|
297 |
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
|
|
|
298 |
\CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
|
|
|
299 |
|
|
|
300 |
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
|
|
|
301 |
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
|
|
|
302 |
|
|
|
303 |
% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
|
|
|
304 |
% will go into draft mode.
|
|
|
305 |
\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
|
|
306 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
|
|
307 |
% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
|
|
|
308 |
% used by the document.
|
|
|
309 |
\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
|
|
310 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
|
|
311 |
% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
|
|
|
312 |
\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
|
|
313 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue}
|
|
|
314 |
\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
|
|
|
315 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
|
|
316 |
|
|
|
317 |
\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
|
|
318 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
|
|
319 |
|
|
|
320 |
\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
|
|
321 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
|
|
322 |
|
|
|
323 |
\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
|
|
324 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
|
|
|
325 |
|
|
|
326 |
\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
|
|
327 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
|
|
328 |
|
|
|
329 |
\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
|
|
|
330 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
|
|
331 |
|
|
|
332 |
\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
|
|
|
333 |
|
|
|
334 |
\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
|
|
|
335 |
|
|
|
336 |
\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}
|
|
|
337 |
|
|
|
338 |
\DeclareOption{compsocconf}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsocconftrue}
|
|
|
339 |
|
|
|
340 |
\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
|
|
|
341 |
|
|
|
342 |
|
|
|
343 |
% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
|
|
|
344 |
\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
|
|
|
345 |
% overrride these defaults per user requests
|
|
|
346 |
\ProcessOptions
|
|
|
347 |
|
|
|
348 |
|
|
|
349 |
|
|
|
350 |
% Computer Society conditional execution command
|
|
|
351 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
|
|
|
352 |
% inverse
|
|
|
353 |
\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
|
|
|
354 |
% compsoc conference
|
|
|
355 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
|
|
|
356 |
% compsoc not conference
|
|
|
357 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
|
|
|
358 |
|
|
|
359 |
|
|
|
360 |
% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
|
|
|
361 |
% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
|
|
|
362 |
\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
|
|
|
363 |
\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
|
|
|
364 |
\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
|
|
|
365 |
|
|
|
366 |
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}
|
|
|
367 |
|
|
|
368 |
% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
|
|
|
369 |
% not Times Roman.
|
|
|
370 |
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
|
|
|
371 |
|
|
|
372 |
% enable Times/Palatino main text font
|
|
|
373 |
\normalfont\selectfont
|
|
|
374 |
|
|
|
375 |
|
|
|
376 |
|
|
|
377 |
|
|
|
378 |
|
|
|
379 |
% V1.7 conference notice message hook
|
|
|
380 |
\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
|
|
|
381 |
\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
|
|
|
382 |
\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
|
|
|
383 |
\typeout{}%
|
|
|
384 |
\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
|
|
|
385 |
\typeout{ of your paper;}%
|
|
|
386 |
\typeout{}%
|
|
|
387 |
\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
|
|
|
388 |
\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
|
|
|
389 |
\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
|
|
|
390 |
\typeout{}}
|
|
|
391 |
|
|
|
392 |
|
|
|
393 |
% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
|
|
|
394 |
\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
|
|
|
395 |
|
|
|
396 |
|
|
|
397 |
% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
|
|
|
398 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
|
|
|
399 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
|
|
|
400 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
|
|
|
401 |
\fi%
|
|
|
402 |
\fi
|
|
|
403 |
|
|
|
404 |
|
|
|
405 |
% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
|
|
|
406 |
% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
|
|
|
407 |
% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
|
|
|
408 |
% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
|
|
|
409 |
% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
|
|
|
410 |
{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
|
|
|
411 |
% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
|
|
|
412 |
% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
|
|
|
413 |
% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
|
|
|
414 |
\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
|
|
|
415 |
\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
|
|
|
416 |
% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
|
|
|
417 |
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
|
|
418 |
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
|
|
|
419 |
\else
|
|
|
420 |
% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
|
|
|
421 |
\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
|
|
|
422 |
\fi}}
|
|
|
423 |
|
|
|
424 |
% let the user know the selected papersize
|
|
|
425 |
\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
|
|
|
426 |
(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
|
|
|
427 |
|
|
|
428 |
\ifCLASSINFOpdf
|
|
|
429 |
\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
|
|
|
430 |
\else
|
|
|
431 |
\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
|
|
|
432 |
\fi
|
|
|
433 |
|
|
|
434 |
|
|
|
435 |
% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
|
|
|
436 |
% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
|
|
|
437 |
% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
|
|
|
438 |
% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
|
|
|
439 |
% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
|
|
|
440 |
% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
|
|
|
441 |
% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
|
|
|
442 |
%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
|
|
|
443 |
%\def\@journal{}
|
|
|
444 |
|
|
|
445 |
|
|
|
446 |
|
|
|
447 |
% pointsize values
|
|
|
448 |
% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
|
|
|
449 |
\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
|
|
|
450 |
\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
|
|
|
451 |
\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
|
|
|
452 |
\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
|
|
|
453 |
|
|
|
454 |
|
|
|
455 |
|
|
|
456 |
% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed)
|
|
|
457 |
% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
|
|
|
458 |
% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
|
|
|
459 |
% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
|
|
|
460 |
% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading)
|
|
|
461 |
% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down)
|
|
|
462 |
% 10pt 58 12pt (exact)
|
|
|
463 |
% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down)
|
|
|
464 |
% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact)
|
|
|
465 |
%
|
|
|
466 |
|
|
|
467 |
% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
|
|
|
468 |
% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
|
|
|
469 |
% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
|
|
|
470 |
\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
|
|
471 |
\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
|
|
|
472 |
|
|
|
473 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
|
|
474 |
\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
|
|
|
475 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
|
|
|
476 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
|
|
|
477 |
\normalsize
|
|
|
478 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
|
|
|
479 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
|
|
480 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
|
|
|
481 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
|
|
|
482 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
|
|
|
483 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
|
|
|
484 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
|
|
|
485 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
|
|
|
486 |
% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
|
|
|
487 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
|
|
|
488 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
|
|
|
489 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
|
|
|
490 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
|
|
|
491 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
|
|
|
492 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
|
|
493 |
\fi
|
|
|
494 |
|
|
|
495 |
|
|
|
496 |
% Check if we have selected 10 points
|
|
|
497 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
|
|
|
498 |
\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
|
|
|
499 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
|
|
|
500 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
|
|
|
501 |
\normalsize
|
|
|
502 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
|
|
|
503 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
|
|
504 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
|
|
|
505 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
|
|
|
506 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
|
|
|
507 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
|
|
|
508 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
|
|
|
509 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
|
|
|
510 |
% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
|
|
|
511 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
|
|
|
512 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
|
|
|
513 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
|
|
|
514 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
|
|
|
515 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
|
|
516 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
|
|
517 |
\fi
|
|
|
518 |
|
|
|
519 |
|
|
|
520 |
% Check if we have selected 11 points
|
|
|
521 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
|
|
|
522 |
\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
|
|
|
523 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
|
|
|
524 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
|
|
|
525 |
\normalsize
|
|
|
526 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
|
|
|
527 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
|
|
528 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
|
|
|
529 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
|
|
|
530 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
|
|
|
531 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
|
|
|
532 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
|
|
|
533 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
|
|
|
534 |
% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
|
|
|
535 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
|
|
|
536 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
|
|
|
537 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
|
|
|
538 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
|
|
|
539 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
|
|
540 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
|
|
541 |
\fi
|
|
|
542 |
|
|
|
543 |
|
|
|
544 |
% Check if we have selected 12 points
|
|
|
545 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
|
|
|
546 |
\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
|
|
|
547 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
|
|
|
548 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
|
|
|
549 |
\normalsize
|
|
|
550 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
|
|
|
551 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
|
|
552 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
|
|
|
553 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
|
|
|
554 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
|
|
|
555 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
|
|
|
556 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
|
|
|
557 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
|
|
|
558 |
% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
|
|
|
559 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
|
|
|
560 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
|
|
|
561 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
|
|
|
562 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
|
|
|
563 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
|
|
|
564 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
|
|
565 |
\fi
|
|
|
566 |
|
|
|
567 |
|
|
|
568 |
% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
|
|
|
569 |
% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
|
|
|
570 |
% tolerance to turn off this warning
|
|
|
571 |
\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
|
|
|
572 |
% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
|
|
|
573 |
|
|
|
574 |
|
|
|
575 |
% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
|
|
|
576 |
% technote
|
|
|
577 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
|
|
|
578 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
|
|
|
579 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
|
|
|
580 |
\fi%
|
|
|
581 |
\fi
|
|
|
582 |
|
|
|
583 |
|
|
|
584 |
% V1.7
|
|
|
585 |
% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
|
|
|
586 |
% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
|
|
|
587 |
% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
|
|
|
588 |
\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
|
|
|
589 |
\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
|
|
|
590 |
\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
|
|
|
591 |
\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
|
|
|
592 |
\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
|
|
|
593 |
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
|
|
|
594 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
|
|
|
595 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
|
|
|
596 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
|
|
|
597 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
|
|
|
598 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
|
|
|
599 |
\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
|
|
|
600 |
|
|
|
601 |
|
|
|
602 |
|
|
|
603 |
|
|
|
604 |
% set the default \baselinestretch
|
|
|
605 |
\def\baselinestretch{1}
|
|
|
606 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
607 |
\def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
|
|
|
608 |
\fi
|
|
|
609 |
|
|
|
610 |
|
|
|
611 |
% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
|
|
|
612 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
613 |
\else
|
|
|
614 |
\edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
|
|
|
615 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
|
|
|
616 |
\baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
|
|
617 |
\fi
|
|
|
618 |
|
|
|
619 |
\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
|
|
|
620 |
|
|
|
621 |
|
|
|
622 |
|
|
|
623 |
|
|
|
624 |
% store the normalsize baselineskip
|
|
|
625 |
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
|
|
|
626 |
\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
|
|
|
627 |
% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
|
|
|
628 |
% we could save a register by giving the user access to
|
|
|
629 |
% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
|
|
|
630 |
% its read only internal status
|
|
|
631 |
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
|
|
632 |
\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
|
|
|
633 |
% store the nominal value of jot
|
|
|
634 |
\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
|
|
|
635 |
\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
|
|
|
636 |
|
|
|
637 |
% set \jot
|
|
|
638 |
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
|
|
|
639 |
|
|
|
640 |
|
|
|
641 |
|
|
|
642 |
|
|
|
643 |
% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
|
|
|
644 |
% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
|
|
|
645 |
% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
|
|
|
646 |
% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
|
|
|
647 |
% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
|
|
|
648 |
%
|
|
|
649 |
% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
|
|
|
650 |
%
|
|
|
651 |
% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
|
|
|
652 |
% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE
|
|
|
653 |
% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
|
|
|
654 |
% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
|
|
|
655 |
% 35% nominal
|
|
|
656 |
% 23% minimum
|
|
|
657 |
% 50% maximum
|
|
|
658 |
% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
|
|
|
659 |
%
|
|
|
660 |
% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
|
|
|
661 |
% 37.5% nominal
|
|
|
662 |
% 23% minimum
|
|
|
663 |
% 55% maximum
|
|
|
664 |
|
|
|
665 |
% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
|
|
|
666 |
% for medium (normal weight)
|
|
|
667 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
|
|
|
668 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
|
|
|
669 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
|
|
|
670 |
|
|
|
671 |
% for bold
|
|
|
672 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
|
|
|
673 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
|
|
|
674 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
|
|
|
675 |
|
|
|
676 |
|
|
|
677 |
% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
|
|
|
678 |
% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
|
|
|
679 |
% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
|
|
|
680 |
% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
|
|
|
681 |
% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
|
|
|
682 |
% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
|
|
|
683 |
\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
|
|
|
684 |
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
|
|
|
685 |
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
|
|
686 |
\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
|
|
687 |
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
|
|
688 |
\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
|
|
689 |
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
|
|
690 |
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
|
|
691 |
\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
|
|
|
692 |
|
|
|
693 |
% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
|
|
|
694 |
\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
|
|
|
695 |
\mdseries
|
|
|
696 |
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
|
|
|
697 |
\bfseries
|
|
|
698 |
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
|
|
|
699 |
}}
|
|
|
700 |
|
|
|
701 |
% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
|
|
|
702 |
% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
|
|
|
703 |
% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we
|
|
|
704 |
% won't alter these either.
|
|
|
705 |
\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
|
|
|
706 |
\normalfont
|
|
|
707 |
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
708 |
\normalfont\itshape
|
|
|
709 |
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
710 |
}}
|
|
|
711 |
|
|
|
712 |
% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
|
|
|
713 |
% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a
|
|
|
714 |
% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
|
|
|
715 |
\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
|
|
|
716 |
\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
717 |
\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
718 |
\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
719 |
\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
720 |
\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
721 |
\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
722 |
\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
723 |
\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
724 |
\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
|
|
725 |
\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
|
|
|
726 |
|
|
|
727 |
% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
|
|
|
728 |
% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
|
|
|
729 |
% sure all the default fonts are loaded
|
|
|
730 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
|
|
|
731 |
\@IEEEtunefonts
|
|
|
732 |
\fi
|
|
|
733 |
|
|
|
734 |
% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
|
|
|
735 |
\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
|
|
|
736 |
|
|
|
737 |
|
|
|
738 |
|
|
|
739 |
% V1.6
|
|
|
740 |
% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
|
|
|
741 |
% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
|
|
|
742 |
% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
|
|
|
743 |
% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
|
|
|
744 |
% but the appearance will be much better "right out
|
|
|
745 |
% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
|
|
|
746 |
% TeX default is 50
|
|
|
747 |
\hyphenpenalty=750
|
|
|
748 |
% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
|
|
|
749 |
% The TeX default is 1000
|
|
|
750 |
\hbadness=1350
|
|
|
751 |
% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
|
|
|
752 |
\frenchspacing
|
|
|
753 |
|
|
|
754 |
% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
|
|
|
755 |
\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
|
|
|
756 |
\relpenalty=800 % default 500
|
|
|
757 |
|
|
|
758 |
|
|
|
759 |
% margin note stuff
|
|
|
760 |
\marginparsep 10pt
|
|
|
761 |
\marginparwidth 20pt
|
|
|
762 |
\marginparpush 25pt
|
|
|
763 |
|
|
|
764 |
|
|
|
765 |
% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
|
|
|
766 |
\lineskip 0pt
|
|
|
767 |
\normallineskip 0pt
|
|
|
768 |
\lineskiplimit 0pt
|
|
|
769 |
\normallineskiplimit 0pt
|
|
|
770 |
|
|
|
771 |
% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
|
|
|
772 |
% footline
|
|
|
773 |
\footskip 0.4in
|
|
|
774 |
|
|
|
775 |
% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
|
|
|
776 |
% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
|
|
|
777 |
\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
|
|
|
778 |
|
|
|
779 |
\parindent 1.0em
|
|
|
780 |
|
|
|
781 |
\topmargin -49.0pt
|
|
|
782 |
\headheight 12pt
|
|
|
783 |
\headsep 0.25in
|
|
|
784 |
|
|
|
785 |
% use the normal font baselineskip
|
|
|
786 |
% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
|
|
|
787 |
\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
|
|
788 |
\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt
|
|
|
789 |
% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
|
|
790 |
% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used
|
|
|
791 |
% to determine these values.
|
|
|
792 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page
|
|
|
793 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page
|
|
|
794 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page
|
|
|
795 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page
|
|
|
796 |
|
|
|
797 |
|
|
|
798 |
\columnsep 1pc
|
|
|
799 |
\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
|
|
|
800 |
|
|
|
801 |
|
|
|
802 |
% the default side margins are equal
|
|
|
803 |
\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
|
|
|
804 |
\oddsidemargin 19.05mm
|
|
|
805 |
\evensidemargin 19.05mm
|
|
|
806 |
\else
|
|
|
807 |
\oddsidemargin 0.680in
|
|
|
808 |
\evensidemargin 0.680in
|
|
|
809 |
\fi
|
|
|
810 |
% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
|
|
|
811 |
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
812 |
\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
813 |
|
|
|
814 |
|
|
|
815 |
|
|
|
816 |
% adjust margins for conference mode
|
|
|
817 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
818 |
\topmargin -0.25in
|
|
|
819 |
% we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
|
|
|
820 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
|
|
|
821 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
|
|
|
822 |
\textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
|
|
|
823 |
% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
|
|
824 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page
|
|
|
825 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page
|
|
|
826 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page
|
|
|
827 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page
|
|
|
828 |
\fi
|
|
|
829 |
|
|
|
830 |
|
|
|
831 |
% compsoc conference
|
|
|
832 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf
|
|
|
833 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
834 |
% compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
|
|
|
835 |
\columnsep 0.25in
|
|
|
836 |
% compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
|
|
|
837 |
\topmargin 0in
|
|
|
838 |
%\addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
|
|
|
839 |
% we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
|
|
|
840 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
|
|
|
841 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
|
|
|
842 |
\textheight 9.0in % (641.39625pt)
|
|
|
843 |
|
|
|
844 |
% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
|
|
845 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page
|
|
|
846 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=54\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 54 lines/page
|
|
|
847 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page
|
|
|
848 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page
|
|
|
849 |
\textwidth 7in
|
|
|
850 |
|
|
|
851 |
|
|
|
852 |
%adjust text h/w for A4 paper
|
|
|
853 |
\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
|
|
|
854 |
\textheight 9.69in
|
|
|
855 |
\textwidth 6.77in
|
|
|
856 |
\fi
|
|
|
857 |
|
|
|
858 |
% the default side margins are equal
|
|
|
859 |
\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
|
|
|
860 |
\oddsidemargin 19.05mm
|
|
|
861 |
\evensidemargin 19.05mm
|
|
|
862 |
\else
|
|
|
863 |
\oddsidemargin 0.75in
|
|
|
864 |
\evensidemargin 0.75in
|
|
|
865 |
\fi
|
|
|
866 |
% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
|
|
|
867 |
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
868 |
\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
869 |
\fi\fi
|
|
|
870 |
|
|
|
871 |
|
|
|
872 |
|
|
|
873 |
% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
|
|
|
874 |
% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
|
|
|
875 |
% space between the lines for editor's comments
|
|
|
876 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
877 |
% want 1in from top of paper to text
|
|
|
878 |
\setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
|
|
|
879 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
|
|
|
880 |
% we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
|
|
|
881 |
\oddsidemargin 0in
|
|
|
882 |
\evensidemargin 0in
|
|
|
883 |
% set the text width
|
|
|
884 |
\setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
|
|
|
885 |
\addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
|
|
|
886 |
\setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
|
|
|
887 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
|
|
|
888 |
% digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
|
|
|
889 |
% this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
|
|
|
890 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
|
|
|
891 |
\divide\textheight by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
892 |
\multiply\textheight by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
893 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
|
|
|
894 |
\fi
|
|
|
895 |
|
|
|
896 |
|
|
|
897 |
|
|
|
898 |
% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
|
|
|
899 |
% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
|
|
|
900 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
901 |
\else
|
|
|
902 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
903 |
\edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
|
|
904 |
\fi
|
|
|
905 |
\fi
|
|
|
906 |
|
|
|
907 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
908 |
\else
|
|
|
909 |
% if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
|
|
|
910 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
911 |
\edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
|
|
912 |
\fi
|
|
|
913 |
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
|
|
914 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
|
|
|
915 |
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
|
|
916 |
\else
|
|
|
917 |
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
|
|
918 |
\fi
|
|
|
919 |
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
920 |
\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
921 |
\setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
|
|
|
922 |
\addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
|
|
923 |
\addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
|
|
924 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and
|
|
|
925 |
outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
|
|
926 |
\fi
|
|
|
927 |
|
|
|
928 |
|
|
|
929 |
|
|
|
930 |
% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
|
|
|
931 |
% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
|
|
|
932 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
933 |
\else
|
|
|
934 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
935 |
\edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
|
|
936 |
\fi
|
|
|
937 |
\fi
|
|
|
938 |
|
|
|
939 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
940 |
\else
|
|
|
941 |
% if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
|
|
|
942 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
|
|
943 |
\edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
|
|
|
944 |
\fi
|
|
|
945 |
\setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
|
|
946 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
|
|
|
947 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
|
|
|
948 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
|
|
|
949 |
\setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
|
|
|
950 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
|
|
951 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
|
|
|
952 |
% in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
|
|
|
953 |
% we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
|
|
|
954 |
% an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
|
|
|
955 |
% correct for both.
|
|
|
956 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
|
|
|
957 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and
|
|
|
958 |
bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
|
|
959 |
\fi
|
|
|
960 |
|
|
|
961 |
|
|
|
962 |
|
|
|
963 |
|
|
|
964 |
|
|
|
965 |
|
|
|
966 |
|
|
|
967 |
% LIST SPACING CONTROLS
|
|
|
968 |
|
|
|
969 |
% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
|
|
|
970 |
% above and below \trivlist
|
|
|
971 |
% Both \list and IED lists override this.
|
|
|
972 |
% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
|
|
|
973 |
% things built from \trivlist like the \center
|
|
|
974 |
% environment.
|
|
|
975 |
\topsep 0.5\baselineskip
|
|
|
976 |
|
|
|
977 |
% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
|
|
|
978 |
% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase
|
|
|
979 |
% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
|
|
|
980 |
% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
|
|
|
981 |
\partopsep \z@
|
|
|
982 |
|
|
|
983 |
% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists.
|
|
|
984 |
% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
|
|
|
985 |
% so this is also zero.
|
|
|
986 |
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
|
|
|
987 |
% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
|
|
|
988 |
\parsep \z@
|
|
|
989 |
|
|
|
990 |
% Controls the extra spacing between list items.
|
|
|
991 |
% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
|
|
|
992 |
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
|
|
|
993 |
% lists (but not IED lists).
|
|
|
994 |
\itemsep \z@
|
|
|
995 |
|
|
|
996 |
% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
|
|
|
997 |
% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
|
|
|
998 |
% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
|
|
|
999 |
% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
|
|
|
1000 |
% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
|
|
|
1001 |
\itemindent -1em
|
|
|
1002 |
|
|
|
1003 |
% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
|
|
|
1004 |
% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
|
|
|
1005 |
% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
|
|
|
1006 |
% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
|
|
|
1007 |
\leftmargin 2em
|
|
|
1008 |
|
|
|
1009 |
% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
|
|
|
1010 |
% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
|
|
|
1011 |
% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
|
|
|
1012 |
% all are overridden.
|
|
|
1013 |
\leftmargini 2em
|
|
|
1014 |
%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used.
|
|
|
1015 |
%\leftmargini 0em
|
|
|
1016 |
\leftmarginii 1em
|
|
|
1017 |
\leftmarginiii 1.5em
|
|
|
1018 |
\leftmarginiv 1.5em
|
|
|
1019 |
\leftmarginv 1.0em
|
|
|
1020 |
\leftmarginvi 1.0em
|
|
|
1021 |
\labelsep 0.5em
|
|
|
1022 |
\labelwidth \z@
|
|
|
1023 |
|
|
|
1024 |
|
|
|
1025 |
% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
|
|
|
1026 |
% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
|
|
|
1027 |
% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
|
|
|
1028 |
% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called).
|
|
|
1029 |
% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around
|
|
|
1030 |
% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
|
|
|
1031 |
% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in
|
|
|
1032 |
% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
|
|
|
1033 |
% of these values DO affect \list
|
|
|
1034 |
%
|
|
|
1035 |
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
|
|
|
1036 |
\let\@listI\@listi
|
|
|
1037 |
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
|
|
|
1038 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
|
|
1039 |
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
|
|
|
1040 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
|
|
1041 |
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
|
|
|
1042 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
|
|
1043 |
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
|
|
|
1044 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
|
|
1045 |
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
|
|
|
1046 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
|
|
1047 |
|
|
|
1048 |
|
|
|
1049 |
% IEEE uses 5) not 5.
|
|
|
1050 |
\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
|
|
|
1051 |
|
|
|
1052 |
% IEEE uses a) not (a)
|
|
|
1053 |
\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
|
|
|
1054 |
|
|
|
1055 |
% IEEE uses iii) not iii.
|
|
|
1056 |
\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
|
|
|
1057 |
|
|
|
1058 |
% IEEE uses A) not A.
|
|
|
1059 |
\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
|
|
|
1060 |
|
|
|
1061 |
% exactly the same as in article.cls
|
|
|
1062 |
\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
|
|
|
1063 |
\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
|
|
|
1064 |
\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
|
|
|
1065 |
|
|
|
1066 |
% itemized list label styles
|
|
|
1067 |
\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
|
|
|
1068 |
\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
|
|
|
1069 |
\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
|
|
|
1070 |
\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
|
|
|
1071 |
|
|
|
1072 |
|
|
|
1073 |
|
|
|
1074 |
% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
|
|
|
1075 |
% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
|
|
|
1076 |
% ***************************
|
|
|
1077 |
%
|
|
|
1078 |
%
|
|
|
1079 |
% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
|
|
|
1080 |
% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
|
|
|
1081 |
% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
|
|
|
1082 |
% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
|
|
|
1083 |
% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
|
|
|
1084 |
% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
|
|
|
1085 |
% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose
|
|
|
1086 |
% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
|
|
|
1087 |
% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
|
|
|
1088 |
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
|
|
|
1089 |
\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
|
|
|
1090 |
|
|
|
1091 |
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
|
|
|
1092 |
\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
|
|
|
1093 |
% However, we'll default to using \parindent
|
|
|
1094 |
% which makes more sense to me
|
|
|
1095 |
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
|
|
|
1096 |
\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
|
|
|
1097 |
|
|
|
1098 |
|
|
|
1099 |
% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
|
|
|
1100 |
% are indented to the right.
|
|
|
1101 |
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
|
|
|
1102 |
\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
|
|
|
1103 |
\IEEEelabelindent \parindent
|
|
|
1104 |
|
|
|
1105 |
% This controls the default amount the description list labels
|
|
|
1106 |
% are indented to the right.
|
|
|
1107 |
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
|
|
|
1108 |
\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
|
|
|
1109 |
\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
|
|
|
1110 |
|
|
|
1111 |
% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
|
|
|
1112 |
% The IED environments automatically set its value to
|
|
|
1113 |
% one of the three values above, so global changes do
|
|
|
1114 |
% not have any effect
|
|
|
1115 |
\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
|
|
|
1116 |
\IEEElabelindent \parindent
|
|
|
1117 |
|
|
|
1118 |
% The actual amount labels will be indented is
|
|
|
1119 |
% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
|
|
|
1120 |
% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
|
|
|
1121 |
% This provides a means by which the user can
|
|
|
1122 |
% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
|
|
|
1123 |
% levels
|
|
|
1124 |
% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
|
|
|
1125 |
% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
|
|
|
1126 |
% circumstances.
|
|
|
1127 |
% The first list level almost always has full indention.
|
|
|
1128 |
% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
|
|
|
1129 |
% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
|
|
|
1130 |
% that they don't use any indentation.
|
|
|
1131 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one
|
|
|
1132 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
|
|
|
1133 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
|
|
|
1134 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
|
|
|
1135 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
|
|
|
1136 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
|
|
|
1137 |
|
|
|
1138 |
% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
|
|
|
1139 |
% set to one of the 6 values above
|
|
|
1140 |
% global changes here have no effect
|
|
|
1141 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
|
|
|
1142 |
|
|
|
1143 |
% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
|
|
|
1144 |
% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
|
|
|
1145 |
% the labels.
|
|
|
1146 |
\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
|
|
|
1147 |
\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
|
|
|
1148 |
|
|
|
1149 |
% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
|
|
|
1150 |
% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
|
|
|
1151 |
% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the
|
|
|
1152 |
% spacing in these cases
|
|
|
1153 |
\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
|
|
|
1154 |
\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
|
|
|
1155 |
|
|
|
1156 |
% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
|
|
|
1157 |
% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
|
|
|
1158 |
% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
|
|
|
1159 |
\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
|
|
|
1160 |
\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
|
|
|
1161 |
|
|
|
1162 |
|
|
|
1163 |
% This command is executed within each IED list environment
|
|
|
1164 |
% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the
|
|
|
1165 |
% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing
|
|
|
1166 |
% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
|
|
|
1167 |
% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
|
|
|
1168 |
% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until
|
|
|
1169 |
% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined.
|
|
|
1170 |
\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
|
|
|
1171 |
|
|
|
1172 |
% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
|
|
|
1173 |
% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
|
|
|
1174 |
% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
|
|
|
1175 |
% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
|
|
|
1176 |
% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
|
|
|
1177 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
|
|
1178 |
\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
|
|
|
1179 |
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
|
|
|
1180 |
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
|
|
|
1181 |
|
|
|
1182 |
% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
|
|
|
1183 |
% width of the given text. It is the same as
|
|
|
1184 |
% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
|
|
|
1185 |
% and useful as a shorter alternative.
|
|
|
1186 |
% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
|
|
|
1187 |
% of the longest label in the list
|
|
|
1188 |
\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
|
|
|
1189 |
|
|
|
1190 |
% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the
|
|
|
1191 |
% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
|
|
|
1192 |
% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
|
|
|
1193 |
% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
|
|
|
1194 |
% environments.
|
|
|
1195 |
\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
|
|
|
1196 |
|
|
|
1197 |
% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
|
|
|
1198 |
% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
|
|
|
1199 |
% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
|
|
|
1200 |
% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse)
|
|
|
1201 |
% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
|
|
|
1202 |
% environments to have an effect.
|
|
|
1203 |
\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
|
|
|
1204 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
|
|
|
1205 |
|
|
|
1206 |
% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
|
|
|
1207 |
% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
|
|
|
1208 |
% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option
|
|
|
1209 |
% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
|
|
|
1210 |
\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
|
|
|
1211 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
|
|
|
1212 |
|
|
|
1213 |
|
|
|
1214 |
% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
|
|
|
1215 |
% justification
|
|
|
1216 |
% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
|
|
|
1217 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
|
|
|
1218 |
|
|
|
1219 |
|
|
|
1220 |
% commands to allow the user to control IED
|
|
|
1221 |
% label justifications. Use these commands within
|
|
|
1222 |
% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
|
|
|
1223 |
% Note that changing the normal list justifications
|
|
|
1224 |
% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!
|
|
|
1225 |
% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
|
|
|
1226 |
% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
|
|
|
1227 |
% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
|
|
|
1228 |
% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
|
|
|
1229 |
% justification, description defaults to left.
|
|
|
1230 |
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
|
|
|
1231 |
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
|
|
|
1232 |
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
|
|
|
1233 |
|
|
|
1234 |
|
|
|
1235 |
|
|
|
1236 |
|
|
|
1237 |
% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
|
|
|
1238 |
% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
|
|
|
1239 |
% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list)
|
|
|
1240 |
% from overriding any of our parameters
|
|
|
1241 |
% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
|
|
|
1242 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
|
|
1243 |
\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
|
|
|
1244 |
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
|
|
|
1245 |
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
|
|
|
1246 |
\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
|
|
|
1247 |
\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
|
|
|
1248 |
\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
|
|
|
1249 |
\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
|
|
|
1250 |
\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
|
|
|
1251 |
\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
|
|
|
1252 |
\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
|
|
|
1253 |
|
|
|
1254 |
% Note controlled spacing here
|
|
|
1255 |
\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
|
|
|
1256 |
\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
|
|
|
1257 |
\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
|
|
|
1258 |
\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
|
|
|
1259 |
\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
|
|
|
1260 |
\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
|
|
|
1261 |
\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
|
|
|
1262 |
\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
|
|
|
1263 |
\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
|
|
|
1264 |
\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
|
|
|
1265 |
|
|
|
1266 |
|
|
|
1267 |
% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
|
|
|
1268 |
% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
|
|
|
1269 |
% which must be created by the base classes
|
|
|
1270 |
% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
|
|
|
1271 |
\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
|
|
|
1272 |
\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
|
|
|
1273 |
\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
|
|
|
1274 |
\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
|
|
|
1275 |
|
|
|
1276 |
% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
|
|
|
1277 |
\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
|
|
|
1278 |
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
|
|
|
1279 |
\let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
|
|
|
1280 |
{\endlist}
|
|
|
1281 |
\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
|
|
|
1282 |
\normalfont\bfseries #1}
|
|
|
1283 |
|
|
|
1284 |
|
|
|
1285 |
% override LaTeX's default IED lists
|
|
|
1286 |
\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
|
|
|
1287 |
\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
|
|
|
1288 |
\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
|
|
|
1289 |
\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
|
|
|
1290 |
\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
|
|
|
1291 |
\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
|
|
|
1292 |
|
|
|
1293 |
% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
|
|
|
1294 |
% override itemize, enumerate, or description
|
|
|
1295 |
\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
|
|
|
1296 |
\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
|
|
|
1297 |
\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
|
|
|
1298 |
\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
|
|
|
1299 |
\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
|
|
|
1300 |
\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
|
|
|
1301 |
|
|
|
1302 |
|
|
|
1303 |
% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
|
|
|
1304 |
% commands so they are protected against redefinition
|
|
|
1305 |
\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
|
|
|
1306 |
\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
|
|
|
1307 |
\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
|
|
|
1308 |
\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
|
|
|
1309 |
\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
|
|
|
1310 |
\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
|
|
|
1311 |
|
|
|
1312 |
|
|
|
1313 |
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
|
|
1314 |
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
|
|
1315 |
% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
|
|
|
1316 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
|
|
1317 |
\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
|
|
|
1318 |
\ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
|
|
1319 |
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
|
|
1320 |
\advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
|
|
|
1321 |
\edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
|
|
|
1322 |
% get the labelindentfactor for this level
|
|
|
1323 |
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
|
|
1324 |
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
|
|
1325 |
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
|
|
1326 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
|
|
|
1327 |
% set other defaults
|
|
|
1328 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
|
|
1329 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
|
|
1330 |
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
|
|
1331 |
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
|
|
|
1332 |
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
|
|
1333 |
\partopsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1334 |
\parsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1335 |
\itemsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1336 |
\rightmargin 0em%
|
|
|
1337 |
\listparindent 0em%
|
|
|
1338 |
\itemindent 0em%
|
|
|
1339 |
% calculate the label width
|
|
|
1340 |
% the user can override this later if
|
|
|
1341 |
% they specified a \labelwidth
|
|
|
1342 |
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
|
|
|
1343 |
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
|
|
1344 |
\list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
|
|
|
1345 |
\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
|
|
1346 |
% to our globals
|
|
|
1347 |
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
|
|
1348 |
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
|
|
1349 |
#1\relax%
|
|
|
1350 |
% If the user has requested not to use the
|
|
|
1351 |
% labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent
|
|
|
1352 |
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
|
|
1353 |
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%
|
|
|
1354 |
\fi%
|
|
|
1355 |
% Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
|
|
1356 |
% calculate our left margin based
|
|
|
1357 |
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
|
|
1358 |
% \labelsep
|
|
|
1359 |
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
|
|
1360 |
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
|
|
|
1361 |
\fi}\fi\fi}%
|
|
|
1362 |
|
|
|
1363 |
|
|
|
1364 |
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
|
|
1365 |
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
|
|
1366 |
% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
|
|
|
1367 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
|
|
1368 |
\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
|
|
|
1369 |
\ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
|
|
1370 |
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
|
|
1371 |
\advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
|
|
|
1372 |
\edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
|
|
|
1373 |
% get the labelindentfactor for this level
|
|
|
1374 |
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
|
|
1375 |
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
|
|
1376 |
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
|
|
1377 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
|
|
|
1378 |
% set other defaults
|
|
|
1379 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
|
|
1380 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
|
|
1381 |
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
|
|
1382 |
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
|
|
|
1383 |
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
|
|
1384 |
\partopsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1385 |
\parsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1386 |
\itemsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1387 |
\rightmargin 0em%
|
|
|
1388 |
\listparindent 0em%
|
|
|
1389 |
\itemindent 0em%
|
|
|
1390 |
% calculate the label width
|
|
|
1391 |
% We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
|
|
|
1392 |
% normalfont 1) to 9)
|
|
|
1393 |
% The user can override this later
|
|
|
1394 |
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
|
|
|
1395 |
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
|
|
1396 |
\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
|
|
|
1397 |
\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
|
|
1398 |
% to our globals
|
|
|
1399 |
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
|
|
1400 |
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
|
|
1401 |
#1\relax%
|
|
|
1402 |
% If the user has requested not to use the
|
|
|
1403 |
% IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
|
|
1404 |
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
|
|
1405 |
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
|
|
1406 |
\fi%
|
|
|
1407 |
% Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
|
|
1408 |
% calculate our left margin based
|
|
|
1409 |
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
|
|
1410 |
% \labelsep
|
|
|
1411 |
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
|
|
1412 |
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
|
|
|
1413 |
\fi}\fi\fi}%
|
|
|
1414 |
|
|
|
1415 |
|
|
|
1416 |
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
|
|
1417 |
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
|
|
1418 |
% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
|
|
|
1419 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
|
|
1420 |
\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
|
|
|
1421 |
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
|
|
1422 |
% get the labelindentfactor for this level
|
|
|
1423 |
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
|
|
1424 |
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
|
|
1425 |
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
|
|
1426 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
|
|
|
1427 |
% set other defaults
|
|
|
1428 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
|
|
1429 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
|
|
1430 |
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
|
|
1431 |
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
|
|
|
1432 |
% assume normal labelsep
|
|
|
1433 |
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
|
|
1434 |
\partopsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1435 |
\parsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1436 |
\itemsep 0ex%
|
|
|
1437 |
\rightmargin 0em%
|
|
|
1438 |
\listparindent 0em%
|
|
|
1439 |
\itemindent 0em%
|
|
|
1440 |
% Bogus label width in case the user forgets
|
|
|
1441 |
% to set it.
|
|
|
1442 |
% TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
|
|
|
1443 |
% can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to
|
|
|
1444 |
% display it on the screen during compilation
|
|
|
1445 |
% (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
|
|
|
1446 |
% which label is the widest)
|
|
|
1447 |
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
|
|
|
1448 |
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
|
|
1449 |
\list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
|
|
1450 |
% to our globals
|
|
|
1451 |
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
|
|
1452 |
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
|
|
1453 |
#1\relax%
|
|
|
1454 |
% If the user has requested not to use the
|
|
|
1455 |
% labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
|
|
1456 |
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
|
|
1457 |
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
|
|
1458 |
\fi%
|
|
|
1459 |
% Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
|
|
1460 |
% calculate our left margin based
|
|
|
1461 |
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
|
|
1462 |
% \labelsep
|
|
|
1463 |
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
|
|
1464 |
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
|
|
|
1465 |
\fi}\fi}
|
|
|
1466 |
|
|
|
1467 |
% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
|
|
|
1468 |
\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
|
|
|
1469 |
\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
|
|
|
1470 |
\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
|
|
|
1471 |
\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
|
|
|
1472 |
\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
|
|
|
1473 |
|
|
|
1474 |
|
|
|
1475 |
% VERSE and QUOTE
|
|
|
1476 |
% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
|
|
|
1477 |
\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
|
|
|
1478 |
\list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
|
|
|
1479 |
\rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
|
|
|
1480 |
{\endlist}
|
|
|
1481 |
\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
|
|
|
1482 |
\rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
|
|
|
1483 |
{\endlist}
|
|
|
1484 |
\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
|
|
|
1485 |
{\endlist}
|
|
|
1486 |
|
|
|
1487 |
|
|
|
1488 |
% \titlepage
|
|
|
1489 |
% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
|
|
|
1490 |
% way to create the title page.
|
|
|
1491 |
\newif\if@restonecol
|
|
|
1492 |
\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
|
|
|
1493 |
\else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
|
|
|
1494 |
\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
|
|
|
1495 |
|
|
|
1496 |
% standard values from article.cls
|
|
|
1497 |
\arraycolsep 5pt
|
|
|
1498 |
\arrayrulewidth .4pt
|
|
|
1499 |
\doublerulesep 2pt
|
|
|
1500 |
|
|
|
1501 |
\tabcolsep 6pt
|
|
|
1502 |
\tabbingsep 0.5em
|
|
|
1503 |
|
|
|
1504 |
|
|
|
1505 |
%% FOOTNOTES
|
|
|
1506 |
%
|
|
|
1507 |
%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
1508 |
% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
|
|
|
1509 |
% space added above the footnotes (if present)
|
|
|
1510 |
\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
|
|
1511 |
|
|
|
1512 |
% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
|
|
|
1513 |
% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
|
|
|
1514 |
% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
|
|
|
1515 |
% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
|
|
|
1516 |
% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
|
|
|
1517 |
% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip
|
|
|
1518 |
% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to
|
|
|
1519 |
% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
|
|
|
1520 |
% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad
|
|
|
1521 |
% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
|
|
|
1522 |
% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
|
|
|
1523 |
% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
|
|
|
1524 |
{\footnotesize
|
|
|
1525 |
\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
|
|
|
1526 |
|
|
|
1527 |
|
|
|
1528 |
\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
|
|
|
1529 |
\fboxsep = 3pt
|
|
|
1530 |
\fboxrule = .4pt
|
|
|
1531 |
% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
|
|
|
1532 |
% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
|
|
|
1533 |
% box resizing tricks here.
|
|
|
1534 |
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
|
|
|
1535 |
% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
|
|
|
1536 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
1537 |
\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
|
|
|
1538 |
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
|
|
|
1539 |
\fi
|
|
|
1540 |
|
|
|
1541 |
% IEEE does not use footnote rules
|
|
|
1542 |
\def\footnoterule{}
|
|
|
1543 |
|
|
|
1544 |
% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
|
|
|
1545 |
% system to implement this.
|
|
|
1546 |
\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
|
|
|
1547 |
\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
|
|
|
1548 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
1549 |
\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
|
|
|
1550 |
\kern-5pt
|
|
|
1551 |
\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
|
|
|
1552 |
\kern4.6pt
|
|
|
1553 |
\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
|
|
|
1554 |
\else
|
|
|
1555 |
\relax
|
|
|
1556 |
\fi}
|
|
|
1557 |
\fi
|
|
|
1558 |
|
|
|
1559 |
% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
|
|
|
1560 |
\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
1561 |
|
|
|
1562 |
% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
|
|
|
1563 |
% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
|
|
|
1564 |
% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
|
|
|
1565 |
\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
|
|
|
1566 |
|
|
|
1567 |
% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
|
|
|
1568 |
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
|
|
|
1569 |
|
|
|
1570 |
% technotes do not allow /paragraph
|
|
|
1571 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
|
|
1572 |
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
|
|
|
1573 |
\fi
|
|
|
1574 |
% neither do compsoc conferences
|
|
|
1575 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
|
|
|
1576 |
|
|
|
1577 |
|
|
|
1578 |
\newcounter{section}
|
|
|
1579 |
\newcounter{subsection}[section]
|
|
|
1580 |
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
|
|
|
1581 |
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
|
1583 |
% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
|
|
|
1584 |
% have their own, different, implementations
|
|
|
1585 |
\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
|
|
|
1586 |
|
|
|
1587 |
% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
|
|
|
1588 |
\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1
|
|
|
1589 |
\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
|
|
|
1590 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
1591 |
% compsoc is all arabic
|
|
|
1592 |
\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
|
|
|
1593 |
\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
|
|
|
1594 |
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
|
|
|
1595 |
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
|
|
|
1596 |
\else
|
|
|
1597 |
\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I
|
|
|
1598 |
% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around -
|
|
|
1599 |
\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A
|
|
|
1600 |
% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1
|
|
|
1601 |
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1
|
|
|
1602 |
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a
|
|
|
1603 |
\fi
|
|
|
1604 |
|
|
|
1605 |
% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
|
|
|
1606 |
% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
|
|
|
1607 |
% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
|
|
|
1608 |
% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
|
|
|
1609 |
\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
|
|
|
1610 |
\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
|
|
|
1611 |
|
|
|
1612 |
|
|
|
1613 |
% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
|
|
|
1614 |
% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
|
|
|
1615 |
% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
|
|
|
1616 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
1617 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
|
|
1618 |
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
|
|
|
1619 |
\def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
|
|
|
1620 |
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
|
|
|
1621 |
\def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
|
|
|
1622 |
\else% compsoc not conferencs
|
|
|
1623 |
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
|
|
|
1624 |
\def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
|
|
|
1625 |
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
|
|
|
1626 |
\def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
|
|
|
1627 |
\fi
|
|
|
1628 |
\else% not compsoc
|
|
|
1629 |
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I.
|
|
|
1630 |
\def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B.
|
|
|
1631 |
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3)
|
|
|
1632 |
\def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d)
|
|
|
1633 |
\fi
|
|
|
1634 |
|
|
|
1635 |
% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
|
|
|
1636 |
\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
|
|
|
1637 |
% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
1638 |
\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
|
|
|
1639 |
% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
|
|
|
1640 |
% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
|
|
|
1641 |
\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
|
|
|
1642 |
|
|
|
1643 |
|
|
|
1644 |
|
|
|
1645 |
% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
|
|
|
1646 |
\def\contentsname{Contents}
|
|
|
1647 |
\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
|
|
|
1648 |
\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
|
|
|
1649 |
\def\refname{References}
|
|
|
1650 |
\def\indexname{Index}
|
|
|
1651 |
\def\figurename{Fig.}
|
|
|
1652 |
\def\tablename{TABLE}
|
|
|
1653 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
|
|
|
1654 |
\def\partname{Part}
|
|
|
1655 |
\def\appendixname{Appendix}
|
|
|
1656 |
\def\abstractname{Abstract}
|
|
|
1657 |
% IEEE specific names
|
|
|
1658 |
\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords}
|
|
|
1659 |
\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
|
|
|
1660 |
|
|
|
1661 |
|
|
|
1662 |
% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
|
|
1663 |
%
|
|
|
1664 |
\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
|
|
|
1665 |
\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
|
|
|
1666 |
\def\@dotsep{4.5}
|
|
|
1667 |
\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
|
|
|
1668 |
|
|
|
1669 |
% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily
|
|
|
1670 |
% collide with the section titles.
|
|
|
1671 |
% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
|
|
|
1672 |
% MDS 1/2001
|
|
|
1673 |
\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
|
|
|
1674 |
\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
|
|
|
1675 |
\@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
|
|
|
1676 |
\parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
|
|
|
1677 |
\endgroup}
|
|
|
1678 |
% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
|
|
|
1679 |
\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
|
|
|
1680 |
\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
|
|
|
1681 |
% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
|
|
|
1682 |
% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
|
|
|
1683 |
% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
|
|
|
1684 |
\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
|
|
|
1685 |
\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
|
|
|
1686 |
\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
|
|
|
1687 |
\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
|
|
|
1688 |
\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
|
|
|
1689 |
\let\l@table\l@figure
|
|
|
1690 |
|
|
|
1691 |
|
|
|
1692 |
%% Definitions for floats
|
|
|
1693 |
%%
|
|
|
1694 |
%% Normal Floats
|
|
|
1695 |
\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
|
|
1696 |
\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
|
|
|
1697 |
\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
1698 |
\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
|
|
|
1699 |
\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
1700 |
\def\topfraction{0.9}
|
|
|
1701 |
\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
|
|
|
1702 |
\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
|
|
|
1703 |
% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
|
|
|
1704 |
\def\textfraction{0.1}
|
|
|
1705 |
|
|
|
1706 |
%% Double Column Floats
|
|
|
1707 |
\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
|
|
1708 |
|
|
|
1709 |
\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
|
|
|
1710 |
% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
|
|
|
1711 |
% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
|
|
|
1712 |
% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
|
|
|
1713 |
% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
|
|
|
1714 |
% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
|
|
|
1715 |
% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
|
|
|
1716 |
% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
|
|
|
1717 |
% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
|
|
|
1718 |
% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
|
|
|
1719 |
|
|
|
1720 |
\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
1721 |
\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
|
|
|
1722 |
\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
1723 |
\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
|
|
|
1724 |
\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
|
|
|
1725 |
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
|
|
|
1726 |
|
|
|
1727 |
\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
|
|
1728 |
\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
|
|
|
1729 |
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
|
|
|
1730 |
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
|
|
|
1731 |
|
|
|
1732 |
|
|
|
1733 |
|
|
|
1734 |
% article class provides these, we should too.
|
|
|
1735 |
\newlength\abovecaptionskip
|
|
|
1736 |
\newlength\belowcaptionskip
|
|
|
1737 |
% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
|
|
|
1738 |
% captions
|
|
|
1739 |
\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
|
|
|
1740 |
\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
|
|
|
1741 |
% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
|
|
|
1742 |
% overridden by a user
|
|
|
1743 |
\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
|
|
|
1744 |
\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
|
|
|
1745 |
|
|
|
1746 |
|
|
|
1747 |
% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
|
|
|
1748 |
% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
|
|
|
1749 |
\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
|
|
|
1750 |
|
|
|
1751 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
1752 |
% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
|
|
|
1753 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
|
|
1754 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
|
|
1755 |
% test if is a for a figure or table
|
|
|
1756 |
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
|
|
1757 |
% if a table, do table caption
|
|
|
1758 |
\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%
|
|
|
1759 |
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
|
|
1760 |
% if not a table, format it as a figure
|
|
|
1761 |
\else
|
|
|
1762 |
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
|
|
1763 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
|
|
|
1764 |
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
|
|
1765 |
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
|
|
1766 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
|
|
|
1767 |
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
|
|
1768 |
% if caption is shorter than a line, center
|
|
|
1769 |
\else%
|
|
|
1770 |
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
|
|
1771 |
\fi\fi}
|
|
|
1772 |
\else% nonconference compsoc
|
|
|
1773 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
|
|
1774 |
% test if is a for a figure or table
|
|
|
1775 |
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
|
|
1776 |
% if a table, do table caption
|
|
|
1777 |
\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%
|
|
|
1778 |
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
|
|
1779 |
% if not a table, format it as a figure
|
|
|
1780 |
\else
|
|
|
1781 |
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
|
|
1782 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
|
|
|
1783 |
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
|
|
1784 |
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
|
|
1785 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
|
|
|
1786 |
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
|
|
1787 |
% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
|
|
|
1788 |
\else%
|
|
|
1789 |
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
|
|
1790 |
\fi\fi}
|
|
|
1791 |
\fi
|
|
|
1792 |
|
|
|
1793 |
\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
|
|
|
1794 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
|
|
1795 |
% test if is a for a figure or table
|
|
|
1796 |
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
|
|
1797 |
% if a table, do table caption
|
|
|
1798 |
\footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}%
|
|
|
1799 |
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
|
|
1800 |
% if not a table, format it as a figure
|
|
|
1801 |
\else
|
|
|
1802 |
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
|
|
1803 |
% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
|
|
|
1804 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%
|
|
|
1805 |
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
|
|
1806 |
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
|
|
1807 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%
|
|
|
1808 |
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
|
|
1809 |
% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
|
|
|
1810 |
\else%
|
|
|
1811 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
|
|
1812 |
\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
|
|
1813 |
\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
1814 |
\fi
|
|
|
1815 |
|
|
|
1816 |
|
|
|
1817 |
|
|
|
1818 |
% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
|
|
|
1819 |
% within \caption
|
|
|
1820 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
|
|
|
1821 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%
|
|
|
1822 |
\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
|
|
|
1823 |
\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
|
|
|
1824 |
\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
|
|
|
1825 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
|
|
|
1826 |
\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
|
|
|
1827 |
\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
|
|
|
1828 |
\fi
|
|
|
1829 |
|
|
|
1830 |
|
|
|
1831 |
% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
|
|
|
1832 |
% preview-latex
|
|
|
1833 |
\newcounter{figure}
|
|
|
1834 |
\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
|
|
|
1835 |
\def\fps@figure{tbp}
|
|
|
1836 |
\def\ftype@figure{1}
|
|
|
1837 |
\def\ext@figure{lof}
|
|
|
1838 |
\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
|
|
|
1839 |
\def\figure{\@float{figure}}
|
|
|
1840 |
\def\endfigure{\end@float}
|
|
|
1841 |
\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
|
|
|
1842 |
\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
|
|
|
1843 |
\newcounter{table}
|
|
|
1844 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
1845 |
\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
|
|
|
1846 |
\else
|
|
|
1847 |
\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
|
|
|
1848 |
\fi
|
|
|
1849 |
\def\fps@table{tbp}
|
|
|
1850 |
\def\ftype@table{2}
|
|
|
1851 |
\def\ext@table{lot}
|
|
|
1852 |
\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
|
|
|
1853 |
% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
|
|
|
1854 |
% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray
|
|
|
1855 |
\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
|
|
|
1856 |
\def\endtable{\end@float}
|
|
|
1857 |
% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
|
|
|
1858 |
\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
|
|
|
1859 |
\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
|
|
|
1860 |
|
|
|
1861 |
|
|
|
1862 |
|
|
|
1863 |
|
|
|
1864 |
%%
|
|
|
1865 |
%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
|
|
|
1866 |
%%
|
|
|
1867 |
%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX
|
|
|
1868 |
%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett,
|
|
|
1869 |
%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum,
|
|
|
1870 |
%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
|
|
|
1871 |
%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
|
|
|
1872 |
|
|
|
1873 |
|
|
|
1874 |
% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
|
|
|
1875 |
\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
|
|
|
1876 |
|
|
|
1877 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
|
|
|
1878 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse
|
|
|
1879 |
|
|
|
1880 |
\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
|
|
|
1881 |
% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
1882 |
% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
|
|
|
1883 |
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
|
|
|
1884 |
|
|
|
1885 |
\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
|
|
|
1886 |
\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
|
|
|
1887 |
|
|
|
1888 |
|
|
|
1889 |
% The default math style used by the columns
|
|
|
1890 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
|
|
|
1891 |
% The default text style used by the columns
|
|
|
1892 |
% default to using the current font
|
|
|
1893 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
|
|
|
1894 |
|
|
|
1895 |
% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
1896 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
|
|
|
1897 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
|
|
|
1898 |
|
|
|
1899 |
% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
|
|
|
1900 |
% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
|
|
|
1901 |
% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as
|
|
|
1902 |
% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
|
|
|
1903 |
\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
|
|
|
1904 |
\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}
|
|
|
1905 |
\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
|
|
|
1906 |
|
|
|
1907 |
|
|
|
1908 |
\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%
|
|
|
1909 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
1910 |
\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%
|
|
|
1911 |
\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}
|
|
|
1912 |
|
|
|
1913 |
% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation
|
|
|
1914 |
\newif\if@IEEEissubequation%
|
|
|
1915 |
\@IEEEissubequationfalse
|
|
|
1916 |
|
|
|
1917 |
% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
|
|
|
1918 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
|
|
|
1919 |
|
|
|
1920 |
% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
|
|
|
1921 |
% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
|
|
|
1922 |
% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
|
|
1923 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
|
|
|
1924 |
\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%
|
|
|
1925 |
% check if column is defined
|
|
|
1926 |
\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
|
|
1927 |
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
|
|
1928 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%
|
|
|
1929 |
\else% if not, error and use default type
|
|
|
1930 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
|
|
|
1931 |
Using a default centering column instead}%
|
|
|
1932 |
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
|
|
|
1933 |
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
|
|
1934 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%
|
|
|
1935 |
\fi%
|
|
|
1936 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
1937 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
|
|
|
1938 |
|
|
|
1939 |
% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
1940 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
|
|
|
1941 |
|
|
|
1942 |
|
|
|
1943 |
% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
|
|
|
1944 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
|
|
|
1945 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
|
|
|
1946 |
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
|
|
|
1947 |
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
|
|
|
1948 |
|
|
|
1949 |
|
|
|
1950 |
% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
|
|
|
1951 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
|
|
|
1952 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
|
|
|
1953 |
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
|
|
|
1954 |
|
|
|
1955 |
|
|
|
1956 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
|
|
|
1957 |
|
|
|
1958 |
|
|
|
1959 |
% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
|
|
|
1960 |
% used to build up the \halign preamble
|
|
|
1961 |
\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
|
|
|
1962 |
\@@IEEEappendtoksA}
|
|
|
1963 |
|
|
|
1964 |
% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
|
|
|
1965 |
% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
|
|
|
1966 |
\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
|
|
|
1967 |
\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
|
|
|
1968 |
\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
|
|
|
1969 |
|
|
|
1970 |
% define some common column types for the user
|
|
|
1971 |
% math
|
|
|
1972 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
|
|
1973 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
|
|
1974 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
|
|
|
1975 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
|
|
|
1976 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
|
|
|
1977 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
|
|
|
1978 |
% text
|
|
|
1979 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
|
|
|
1980 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
|
|
|
1981 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
|
|
|
1982 |
|
|
|
1983 |
% vertical rules
|
|
|
1984 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
|
|
1985 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
|
|
1986 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
|
|
1987 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
|
|
|
1988 |
{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
|
|
1989 |
|
|
|
1990 |
% horizontal rules
|
|
|
1991 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
|
|
|
1992 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
|
|
|
1993 |
|
|
|
1994 |
% plain
|
|
|
1995 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
|
|
|
1996 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
|
|
|
1997 |
|
|
|
1998 |
% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
|
|
|
1999 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
|
|
2000 |
|
|
|
2001 |
|
|
|
2002 |
% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
|
|
|
2003 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
|
|
|
2004 |
% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
|
|
|
2005 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
|
|
|
2006 |
|
|
|
2007 |
% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
|
|
|
2008 |
% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
|
|
2009 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
|
|
|
2010 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
|
|
|
2011 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
|
|
|
2012 |
|
|
|
2013 |
|
|
|
2014 |
|
|
|
2015 |
% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
|
|
|
2016 |
% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
|
|
|
2017 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
|
|
|
2018 |
% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness.
|
|
|
2019 |
\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
|
|
|
2020 |
|
|
|
2021 |
% creates a blank separator row
|
|
|
2022 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
|
|
|
2023 |
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
|
|
2024 |
% blank arguments inherit the default values
|
|
|
2025 |
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
|
|
|
2026 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
|
|
2027 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
|
|
|
2028 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
|
|
|
2029 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
|
|
|
2030 |
% get the skip value, based on the font commands
|
|
|
2031 |
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
|
|
|
2032 |
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
|
|
|
2033 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
|
|
2034 |
\else%
|
|
|
2035 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
|
|
|
2036 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2037 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
|
|
2038 |
|
|
|
2039 |
% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
|
|
|
2040 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
|
|
|
2041 |
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
|
|
2042 |
% blank arguments inherit the default values
|
|
|
2043 |
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
|
|
|
2044 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
|
|
2045 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
2046 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2047 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
|
|
2048 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
|
|
|
2049 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
|
|
|
2050 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
|
|
|
2051 |
% get the skip value, based on the font commands
|
|
|
2052 |
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
|
|
|
2053 |
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
|
|
|
2054 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
|
|
2055 |
\else%
|
|
|
2056 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
|
|
|
2057 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2058 |
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
|
|
2059 |
|
|
|
2060 |
|
|
|
2061 |
|
|
|
2062 |
% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
|
|
|
2063 |
% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
|
|
2064 |
% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
|
|
|
2065 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
|
|
|
2066 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
|
|
2067 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
2068 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2069 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
|
|
2070 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule
|
|
|
2071 |
% turn off any struts
|
|
|
2072 |
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
|
|
2073 |
|
|
|
2074 |
|
|
|
2075 |
% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
|
|
|
2076 |
% another single rule row
|
|
|
2077 |
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
|
|
2078 |
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
|
|
|
2079 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
|
|
|
2080 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
|
|
2081 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
2082 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2083 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
|
|
2084 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
|
|
|
2085 |
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
|
|
|
2086 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
|
|
2087 |
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
|
|
|
2088 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2089 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
|
|
2090 |
\else%
|
|
|
2091 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
|
|
|
2092 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2093 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
|
|
|
2094 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2095 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
|
|
|
2096 |
\else%
|
|
|
2097 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
|
|
|
2098 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2099 |
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
|
|
|
2100 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
2101 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2102 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
|
|
2103 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2104 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
|
|
2105 |
\else%
|
|
|
2106 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
|
|
2107 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2108 |
}
|
|
|
2109 |
|
|
|
2110 |
% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
|
|
|
2111 |
% another single rule row
|
|
|
2112 |
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
|
|
2113 |
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
|
|
|
2114 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
|
|
|
2115 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
|
|
2116 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
2117 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2118 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
|
|
2119 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
|
|
|
2120 |
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
|
|
|
2121 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
|
|
2122 |
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
|
|
|
2123 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2124 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
|
|
2125 |
\else%
|
|
|
2126 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
|
|
2127 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2128 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
|
|
|
2129 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2130 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
|
|
|
2131 |
\else%
|
|
|
2132 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
|
|
|
2133 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2134 |
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
|
|
|
2135 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
|
|
2136 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2137 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
|
|
2138 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2139 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
|
|
2140 |
\else%
|
|
|
2141 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
|
|
2142 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2143 |
}
|
|
|
2144 |
|
|
|
2145 |
|
|
|
2146 |
|
|
|
2147 |
% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
|
|
|
2148 |
% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
|
|
|
2149 |
% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
|
|
|
2150 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
|
|
|
2151 |
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
|
|
|
2152 |
\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
|
|
|
2153 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
|
|
|
2154 |
\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
|
|
|
2155 |
\repeat%
|
|
|
2156 |
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
|
|
|
2157 |
}
|
|
|
2158 |
|
|
|
2159 |
|
|
|
2160 |
|
|
|
2161 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
|
|
|
2162 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
|
|
|
2163 |
|
|
|
2164 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
|
|
|
2165 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
|
|
|
2166 |
|
|
|
2167 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
|
|
|
2168 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
2169 |
|
|
|
2170 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
|
|
|
2171 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
|
|
|
2172 |
|
|
|
2173 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
|
|
|
2174 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used
|
|
|
2175 |
|
|
|
2176 |
|
|
|
2177 |
|
|
|
2178 |
% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
|
|
|
2179 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
|
|
|
2180 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
|
|
2181 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
|
|
2182 |
% remove stretchability
|
|
|
2183 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2184 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2185 |
% save values
|
|
|
2186 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2187 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
|
|
|
2188 |
|
|
|
2189 |
% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
|
|
|
2190 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
|
|
|
2191 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
|
|
|
2192 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
|
|
|
2193 |
% remove stretchability
|
|
|
2194 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2195 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2196 |
% restore values
|
|
|
2197 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2198 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
|
|
|
2199 |
|
|
|
2200 |
|
|
|
2201 |
% globally restores the strut height and depth to the
|
|
|
2202 |
% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
|
|
|
2203 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
|
|
|
2204 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
|
|
2205 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
|
|
2206 |
% remove stretchability
|
|
|
2207 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2208 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2209 |
% restore values
|
|
|
2210 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2211 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2212 |
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
|
|
|
2213 |
|
|
|
2214 |
|
|
|
2215 |
% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
|
|
|
2216 |
% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
|
|
|
2217 |
% and the use master strut flag, global
|
|
|
2218 |
% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
|
|
|
2219 |
% into the isolation/strut column
|
|
|
2220 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
|
|
|
2221 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
|
|
|
2222 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
|
|
|
2223 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
|
|
|
2224 |
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
|
|
|
2225 |
\fi}
|
|
|
2226 |
|
|
|
2227 |
|
|
|
2228 |
|
|
|
2229 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
|
|
|
2230 |
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
|
|
|
2231 |
% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
|
|
|
2232 |
% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
|
|
|
2233 |
% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
|
|
|
2234 |
% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
|
|
|
2235 |
% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
|
|
|
2236 |
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
|
|
|
2237 |
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
|
|
|
2238 |
% font is used.
|
|
|
2239 |
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
|
|
2240 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
|
|
|
2241 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
|
|
|
2242 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2243 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
|
|
2244 |
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
|
|
2245 |
\else% arg one present
|
|
|
2246 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
|
|
|
2247 |
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
|
|
2248 |
\fi% if null arg
|
|
|
2249 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
|
|
|
2250 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2251 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
|
|
2252 |
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
|
|
2253 |
\else% arg two present
|
|
|
2254 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
|
|
|
2255 |
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
|
|
2256 |
\fi% if null arg
|
|
|
2257 |
% remove stretchability, just to be safe
|
|
|
2258 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2259 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2260 |
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
|
|
2261 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
|
|
|
2262 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2263 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2264 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
|
|
|
2265 |
\else% outer, have to set master strut too
|
|
|
2266 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2267 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2268 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2269 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2270 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
|
|
|
2271 |
\fi}
|
|
|
2272 |
|
|
|
2273 |
|
|
|
2274 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
|
|
|
2275 |
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
|
|
|
2276 |
% and depth to both the master and local struts.
|
|
|
2277 |
% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
|
|
|
2278 |
% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use
|
|
|
2279 |
% of the local strut values.
|
|
|
2280 |
% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
|
|
|
2281 |
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
|
|
|
2282 |
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
|
|
|
2283 |
% font is used.
|
|
|
2284 |
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
|
|
2285 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
|
|
|
2286 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
|
|
|
2287 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
|
|
|
2288 |
\skip0=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
2289 |
\else% arg one present
|
|
|
2290 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
|
|
|
2291 |
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
|
|
2292 |
\fi% if null arg
|
|
|
2293 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
|
|
|
2294 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
|
|
|
2295 |
\skip2=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
2296 |
\else% arg two present
|
|
|
2297 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
|
|
|
2298 |
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
|
|
2299 |
\fi% if null arg
|
|
|
2300 |
% remove stretchability, just to be safe
|
|
|
2301 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2302 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2303 |
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
|
|
2304 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
|
|
|
2305 |
% get local strut size
|
|
|
2306 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
|
|
|
2307 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
|
|
|
2308 |
% add it to the user supplied values
|
|
|
2309 |
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2310 |
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2311 |
% update the local strut size
|
|
|
2312 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2313 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2314 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
|
|
|
2315 |
\else% outer, have to set master strut too
|
|
|
2316 |
% get master strut size
|
|
|
2317 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
|
|
2318 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
|
|
2319 |
% add it to the user supplied values
|
|
|
2320 |
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2321 |
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2322 |
% update the local and master strut sizes
|
|
|
2323 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2324 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2325 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
|
|
2326 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
|
|
2327 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
|
|
|
2328 |
\fi}
|
|
|
2329 |
|
|
|
2330 |
|
|
|
2331 |
% allow user a way to see the struts
|
|
|
2332 |
\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
|
|
|
2333 |
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
|
|
|
2334 |
|
|
|
2335 |
% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
|
|
|
2336 |
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
|
|
2337 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
|
|
|
2338 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
|
|
|
2339 |
% get master strut size
|
|
|
2340 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
|
|
2341 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
|
|
2342 |
\else%
|
|
|
2343 |
% get local strut size
|
|
|
2344 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
|
|
|
2345 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
|
|
|
2346 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2347 |
% remove stretchability, probably not needed
|
|
|
2348 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2349 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2350 |
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
|
|
2351 |
% allow user to see struts if desired
|
|
|
2352 |
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
|
|
|
2353 |
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
|
|
|
2354 |
\else%
|
|
|
2355 |
\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
|
|
|
2356 |
|
|
|
2357 |
|
|
|
2358 |
% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
2359 |
% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide.
|
|
|
2360 |
% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
|
|
|
2361 |
% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
|
|
2362 |
% blank arguments inherit the default values
|
|
|
2363 |
% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
|
|
|
2364 |
\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
|
|
2365 |
\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
|
|
2366 |
\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
|
|
|
2367 |
\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
|
|
|
2368 |
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
|
|
|
2369 |
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2370 |
\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
|
|
2371 |
\else%
|
|
|
2372 |
\skip0=#1\relax%
|
|
|
2373 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2374 |
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
|
|
|
2375 |
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
|
|
|
2376 |
\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
|
|
2377 |
\else%
|
|
|
2378 |
\skip2=#2\relax%
|
|
|
2379 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2380 |
% remove stretchability, probably not needed
|
|
|
2381 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
|
|
2382 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
|
|
2383 |
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
|
|
|
2384 |
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
|
|
|
2385 |
\else%
|
|
|
2386 |
\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
|
|
|
2387 |
|
|
|
2388 |
|
|
|
2389 |
% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
|
|
|
2390 |
% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
|
|
|
2391 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
|
|
|
2392 |
\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
|
|
|
2393 |
|
|
|
2394 |
|
|
|
2395 |
|
|
|
2396 |
\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
|
|
|
2397 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
|
|
|
2398 |
|
|
|
2399 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}
|
|
|
2400 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
|
|
|
2401 |
|
|
|
2402 |
|
|
|
2403 |
% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray.
|
|
|
2404 |
% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
|
|
|
2405 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
|
|
|
2406 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
|
|
|
2407 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%
|
|
|
2408 |
% default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
|
|
|
2409 |
% the star form was involked
|
|
|
2410 |
\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse
|
|
|
2411 |
\else% not the star form
|
|
|
2412 |
\global\@eqnswtrue
|
|
|
2413 |
\fi% if star form
|
|
|
2414 |
\@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations
|
|
|
2415 |
\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation
|
|
|
2416 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
|
|
|
2417 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
|
|
|
2418 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
|
|
|
2419 |
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
|
|
|
2420 |
% no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
|
|
|
2421 |
\lineskip=0pt\relax
|
|
|
2422 |
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
|
|
|
2423 |
\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
|
|
2424 |
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
|
|
|
2425 |
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
|
|
2426 |
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
|
|
|
2427 |
% used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
|
|
|
2428 |
\stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line
|
|
|
2429 |
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
|
|
|
2430 |
\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
|
|
|
2431 |
\IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
|
|
|
2432 |
#1\relax% allow user to override defaults
|
|
|
2433 |
\let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
|
|
|
2434 |
\global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
|
|
|
2435 |
\@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
|
|
2436 |
% put in the column for the equation number
|
|
|
2437 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
|
|
|
2438 |
\toks0={##}%
|
|
|
2439 |
% advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
|
|
|
2440 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
|
|
|
2441 |
% add the isolation column
|
|
|
2442 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
|
|
2443 |
% advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
|
|
|
2444 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
|
|
|
2445 |
% add the equation number col to the preamble
|
|
|
2446 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
|
|
2447 |
% note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
|
|
|
2448 |
% set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
|
|
|
2449 |
\tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
|
|
|
2450 |
% begin the display alignment
|
|
|
2451 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
|
|
|
2452 |
$$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
|
|
|
2453 |
% "exspand" the preamble
|
|
|
2454 |
\span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
|
|
|
2455 |
|
|
|
2456 |
% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
|
|
|
2457 |
% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
|
|
|
2458 |
% restore counters to correct values and exit
|
|
|
2459 |
\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%
|
|
|
2460 |
\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%
|
|
|
2461 |
\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%
|
|
|
2462 |
$$\@ignoretrue}
|
|
|
2463 |
|
|
|
2464 |
% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation
|
|
|
2465 |
\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%
|
|
|
2466 |
\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse
|
|
|
2467 |
|
|
|
2468 |
% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
|
|
|
2469 |
% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
|
|
|
2470 |
% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
|
|
|
2471 |
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
|
|
|
2472 |
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
|
|
|
2473 |
% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
|
|
|
2474 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
|
|
|
2475 |
{\ifnum0=`}\fi
|
|
|
2476 |
\@ifstar{%
|
|
|
2477 |
\global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
|
|
|
2478 |
}{%
|
|
|
2479 |
\global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
|
|
|
2480 |
}%
|
|
|
2481 |
}
|
|
|
2482 |
|
|
|
2483 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
|
|
|
2484 |
|
|
|
2485 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
|
|
|
2486 |
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
|
|
|
2487 |
\@@IEEEeqnarraycr
|
|
|
2488 |
\noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
|
|
|
2489 |
|
|
|
2490 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
|
|
|
2491 |
\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
|
|
|
2492 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
|
|
|
2493 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2494 |
environment}%
|
|
|
2495 |
{Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2496 |
specifications.}\relax%
|
|
|
2497 |
\else
|
|
|
2498 |
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
|
|
|
2499 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
|
|
|
2500 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
|
|
|
2501 |
\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
|
|
|
2502 |
\repeat
|
|
|
2503 |
% this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
|
|
|
2504 |
\fi
|
|
|
2505 |
% execute the &'s
|
|
|
2506 |
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
|
|
|
2507 |
% handle the strut/isolation column
|
|
|
2508 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
|
|
|
2509 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
2510 |
&% and enter the equation number column
|
|
|
2511 |
% is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the
|
|
|
2512 |
% (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was
|
|
|
2513 |
\if@eqnsw%
|
|
|
2514 |
\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%
|
|
|
2515 |
\global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%
|
|
|
2516 |
\else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter
|
|
|
2517 |
\theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%
|
|
|
2518 |
\global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%
|
|
|
2519 |
\fi%
|
|
|
2520 |
% reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers
|
|
|
2521 |
\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
|
|
|
2522 |
\global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag
|
|
|
2523 |
% reset the number of columns the user actually used
|
|
|
2524 |
\global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
|
|
|
2525 |
% the real end of the line
|
|
|
2526 |
\cr}
|
|
|
2527 |
|
|
|
2528 |
|
|
|
2529 |
|
|
|
2530 |
|
|
|
2531 |
|
|
|
2532 |
% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
|
|
|
2533 |
% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
|
|
|
2534 |
% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
|
|
|
2535 |
% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
|
|
|
2536 |
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
|
|
|
2537 |
% within an hbox.
|
|
|
2538 |
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
|
|
|
2539 |
% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
|
|
|
2540 |
% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or
|
|
|
2541 |
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
|
|
|
2542 |
% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
|
|
|
2543 |
% natural width is the default.
|
|
|
2544 |
% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
|
|
|
2545 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
|
|
|
2546 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2547 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2548 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2549 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2550 |
|
|
|
2551 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2552 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2553 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2554 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2555 |
|
|
|
2556 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
|
|
|
2557 |
\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2558 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2559 |
|
|
|
2560 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
|
|
|
2561 |
\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2562 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
|
|
2563 |
|
|
|
2564 |
% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $}
|
|
|
2565 |
% for \vcenter in non-math mode
|
|
|
2566 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
|
|
|
2567 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
|
|
|
2568 |
|
|
|
2569 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
|
|
|
2570 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
|
|
|
2571 |
\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
|
|
|
2572 |
|
|
|
2573 |
% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
|
|
|
2574 |
\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
|
|
|
2575 |
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
|
|
|
2576 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
|
|
|
2577 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
|
|
|
2578 |
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
|
|
|
2579 |
% no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
|
|
|
2580 |
\lineskip=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
2581 |
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
2582 |
\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
|
|
2583 |
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
|
|
|
2584 |
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
|
|
2585 |
% the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
|
|
2586 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
|
|
|
2587 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
|
|
|
2588 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
|
|
|
2589 |
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
|
|
|
2590 |
% used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
|
|
|
2591 |
\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
|
|
|
2592 |
#1\relax% allow user to override defaults
|
|
|
2593 |
\let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
|
|
|
2594 |
\@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
|
|
2595 |
% add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
|
|
|
2596 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
|
|
|
2597 |
\toks0={##}%
|
|
|
2598 |
% add the isolation column to the preamble
|
|
|
2599 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
|
|
2600 |
% set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
|
|
|
2601 |
\tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
|
|
|
2602 |
% begin the alignment
|
|
|
2603 |
\everycr{}%
|
|
|
2604 |
% use only the very first token to determine the positioning
|
|
|
2605 |
% this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
|
|
|
2606 |
% but is probably not worth the effort
|
|
|
2607 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter
|
|
|
2608 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
|
|
2609 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
|
|
|
2610 |
% \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
|
|
|
2611 |
% if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
|
|
|
2612 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
|
|
|
2613 |
% use the appropriate vbox type
|
|
|
2614 |
\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
|
|
|
2615 |
\vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
|
|
|
2616 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
|
|
|
2617 |
\ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
|
|
|
2618 |
\bgroup
|
|
|
2619 |
% "exspand" the preamble
|
|
|
2620 |
\span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
|
|
|
2621 |
|
|
|
2622 |
% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column,
|
|
|
2623 |
% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
|
|
|
2624 |
\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
|
|
|
2625 |
&% enter isolation/strut column
|
|
|
2626 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
|
|
|
2627 |
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
|
|
|
2628 |
% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
2629 |
% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
|
|
|
2630 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
|
|
|
2631 |
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
|
|
|
2632 |
\crcr\egroup\egroup%
|
|
|
2633 |
% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
|
|
|
2634 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
|
|
|
2635 |
|
|
|
2636 |
|
|
|
2637 |
|
|
|
2638 |
% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
|
|
|
2639 |
% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
|
|
|
2640 |
% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
|
|
|
2641 |
% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
|
|
|
2642 |
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
|
|
|
2643 |
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
|
|
|
2644 |
% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
|
|
|
2645 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
|
|
|
2646 |
&% enter isolation/strut column
|
|
|
2647 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
|
|
|
2648 |
% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
|
|
|
2649 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
|
|
|
2650 |
{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
|
|
|
2651 |
\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
|
|
|
2652 |
|
|
|
2653 |
% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
|
|
|
2654 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
|
|
|
2655 |
|
|
|
2656 |
% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
|
|
|
2657 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
|
|
|
2658 |
\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
|
|
|
2659 |
|
|
|
2660 |
|
|
|
2661 |
|
|
|
2662 |
% starts the halign preamble build
|
|
|
2663 |
\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
|
|
|
2664 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
|
|
|
2665 |
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
|
|
|
2666 |
\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
|
|
|
2667 |
% ensure these are valid
|
|
|
2668 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
|
|
|
2669 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
|
|
|
2670 |
% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
|
|
|
2671 |
% use a name that is easier to remember
|
|
|
2672 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
|
|
2673 |
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
|
|
|
2674 |
% tracks number of columns in the preamble
|
|
|
2675 |
\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
|
|
|
2676 |
% record the default end glues
|
|
|
2677 |
\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
|
|
|
2678 |
\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
|
|
|
2679 |
% now parse the user's column specifications
|
|
|
2680 |
\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
|
|
|
2681 |
|
|
|
2682 |
|
|
|
2683 |
% parses and builds the halign preamble
|
|
|
2684 |
\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
|
|
|
2685 |
% use only the very first token to check the end
|
|
|
2686 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
|
|
|
2687 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
|
|
2688 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
|
|
|
2689 |
\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
|
|
|
2690 |
% identify current and next token type
|
|
|
2691 |
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
|
|
|
2692 |
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
|
|
|
2693 |
% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
|
|
|
2694 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
|
|
|
2695 |
% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
|
|
|
2696 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
|
|
|
2697 |
% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
|
|
|
2698 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
|
|
|
2699 |
% process the acquired glue
|
|
|
2700 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
|
|
|
2701 |
% process the acquired col
|
|
|
2702 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
|
|
|
2703 |
% ready prevtype for next col spec.
|
|
|
2704 |
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
|
|
|
2705 |
% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
|
|
|
2706 |
\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
|
|
|
2707 |
|
|
|
2708 |
|
|
|
2709 |
% executed just after preamble build is completed
|
|
|
2710 |
% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
|
|
|
2711 |
\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
|
|
|
2712 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
|
|
|
2713 |
{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
|
|
|
2714 |
\fi%num cols less than 1
|
|
|
2715 |
%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
|
|
|
2716 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
|
|
|
2717 |
|
|
|
2718 |
|
|
|
2719 |
% Identify and return the column specifier's type code
|
|
|
2720 |
\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
2721 |
% use only the very first token to determine the type
|
|
|
2722 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
|
|
|
2723 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
|
|
2724 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
|
|
|
2725 |
% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
|
|
|
2726 |
% n = number
|
|
|
2727 |
% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
|
|
|
2728 |
% c = letter
|
|
|
2729 |
% e = \end
|
|
|
2730 |
% u = undefined
|
|
|
2731 |
% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
|
|
|
2732 |
\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
|
|
|
2733 |
\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
|
|
|
2734 |
\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
|
|
|
2735 |
\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2736 |
\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2737 |
\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2738 |
\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2739 |
\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2740 |
\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2741 |
\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2742 |
\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2743 |
\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2744 |
\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
|
|
2745 |
\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
|
|
|
2746 |
\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|
|
2747 |
\if#2u\relax
|
|
|
2748 |
\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
|
|
|
2749 |
{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
|
|
|
2750 |
as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
|
|
|
2751 |
|
|
|
2752 |
|
|
|
2753 |
% identify the current letter referenced column
|
|
|
2754 |
% if invalid, use a default column
|
|
|
2755 |
\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
|
|
2756 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
|
|
|
2757 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2758 |
Using a default centering column instead}%
|
|
|
2759 |
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
|
|
|
2760 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
|
|
|
2761 |
|
|
|
2762 |
|
|
|
2763 |
% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
|
|
|
2764 |
\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
|
|
|
2765 |
% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
|
|
|
2766 |
% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
|
|
|
2767 |
% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
|
|
|
2768 |
% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
|
|
|
2769 |
% ' = \quad 1em
|
|
|
2770 |
% " = \qquad 2em
|
|
|
2771 |
% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
|
|
|
2772 |
% / = \arraycolsep
|
|
|
2773 |
% ? = 2\arraycolsep
|
|
|
2774 |
% * = 1fil
|
|
|
2775 |
% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
|
|
|
2776 |
% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
|
|
|
2777 |
% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
|
|
|
2778 |
% value for 1em.
|
|
|
2779 |
%
|
|
|
2780 |
% use only the very first token to determine the type
|
|
|
2781 |
% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
|
|
|
2782 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter here
|
|
|
2783 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
|
|
2784 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
|
|
|
2785 |
% get the math font 1em value
|
|
|
2786 |
% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
|
|
|
2787 |
% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
|
|
|
2788 |
% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
|
|
|
2789 |
% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
|
|
|
2790 |
% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
|
|
|
2791 |
% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
|
|
|
2792 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
|
|
|
2793 |
% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
|
|
|
2794 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
|
|
|
2795 |
% identify the glue value based on the first token
|
|
|
2796 |
% we discard anything after the first
|
|
|
2797 |
\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2798 |
\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2799 |
\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2800 |
\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2801 |
\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2802 |
\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2803 |
\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2804 |
\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
|
|
|
2805 |
\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
|
|
2806 |
\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
|
|
|
2807 |
\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
|
|
|
2808 |
\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
|
|
|
2809 |
\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
|
|
|
2810 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2811 |
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2812 |
0pt instead}%
|
|
|
2813 |
{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2814 |
IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
2815 |
|
|
|
2816 |
|
|
|
2817 |
|
|
|
2818 |
% process a numerical digit from the column specification
|
|
|
2819 |
% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
|
|
|
2820 |
% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
|
|
|
2821 |
\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
|
|
|
2822 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2823 |
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2824 |
after the first}%
|
|
|
2825 |
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2826 |
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
|
|
|
2827 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
|
|
|
2828 |
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
|
|
|
2829 |
\else% if we previously aborted a glue
|
|
|
2830 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
|
|
|
2831 |
\else%acquire this number
|
|
|
2832 |
% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
|
|
|
2833 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
|
|
|
2834 |
\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
|
|
|
2835 |
\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
|
|
|
2836 |
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
|
|
|
2837 |
\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
|
|
2838 |
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
|
|
|
2839 |
\else%user glue not defined
|
|
|
2840 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2841 |
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2842 |
0pt instead}%
|
|
|
2843 |
{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2844 |
\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
|
|
|
2845 |
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
|
|
|
2846 |
\fi% glue defined or not
|
|
|
2847 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
|
|
|
2848 |
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
|
|
|
2849 |
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
|
|
|
2850 |
\fi%close acquisition, get glue
|
|
|
2851 |
\fi%discard or acquire number
|
|
|
2852 |
\fi%prevtype glue or not
|
|
|
2853 |
}
|
|
|
2854 |
|
|
|
2855 |
|
|
|
2856 |
% process an acquired glue
|
|
|
2857 |
% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
|
|
|
2858 |
\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
|
|
|
2859 |
\else
|
|
|
2860 |
% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else
|
|
|
2861 |
% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
|
|
|
2862 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
|
|
|
2863 |
\else%not the start glue
|
|
|
2864 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
|
|
|
2865 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2866 |
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2867 |
after the first}%
|
|
|
2868 |
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2869 |
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
|
|
|
2870 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
|
|
|
2871 |
\else% not a back to back glue
|
|
|
2872 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
|
|
|
2873 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
|
|
|
2874 |
\toks0={##}%
|
|
|
2875 |
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
|
|
|
2876 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
|
|
|
2877 |
% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
|
|
|
2878 |
% the column definition
|
|
|
2879 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
|
|
|
2880 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
|
|
|
2881 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
|
|
2882 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
|
|
|
2883 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
2884 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
|
|
2885 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
|
|
|
2886 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
|
|
2887 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
|
|
2888 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
|
|
|
2889 |
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
|
|
|
2890 |
\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
|
|
|
2891 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2892 |
type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2893 |
specifier}%
|
|
|
2894 |
{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
|
|
|
2895 |
between column types.}%
|
|
|
2896 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
|
|
|
2897 |
\fi% previous was a column
|
|
|
2898 |
\fi% back-to-back glues
|
|
|
2899 |
\fi% is start column glue
|
|
|
2900 |
\fi% prev type not a
|
|
|
2901 |
}
|
|
|
2902 |
|
|
|
2903 |
|
|
|
2904 |
% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
|
|
|
2905 |
\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
|
|
|
2906 |
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
|
|
|
2907 |
% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
|
|
|
2908 |
% so we must add this column to the preamble now
|
|
|
2909 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
|
|
|
2910 |
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
|
|
|
2911 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
|
|
|
2912 |
\toks0={##}%
|
|
|
2913 |
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
|
|
|
2914 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
|
|
|
2915 |
% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
|
|
|
2916 |
% the column definition
|
|
|
2917 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
|
|
|
2918 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
|
|
2919 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
|
|
|
2920 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
2921 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
|
|
2922 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
|
|
|
2923 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
|
|
2924 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
|
|
2925 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
|
|
|
2926 |
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
|
|
|
2927 |
\fi%next type not numeral
|
|
|
2928 |
\fi%next type not glue
|
|
|
2929 |
}
|
|
|
2930 |
|
|
|
2931 |
|
|
|
2932 |
%%
|
|
|
2933 |
%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
|
|
|
2934 |
%%
|
|
|
2935 |
|
|
|
2936 |
|
|
|
2937 |
|
|
|
2938 |
|
|
|
2939 |
% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different
|
|
|
2940 |
% modes IEEEtran supports
|
|
|
2941 |
\if@twoside
|
|
|
2942 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
|
|
2943 |
\def\ps@headings{%
|
|
|
2944 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
|
|
|
2945 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
|
|
|
2946 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
2947 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
|
|
2948 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
|
|
2949 |
\else
|
|
|
2950 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
|
|
|
2951 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
|
|
|
2952 |
\fi
|
|
|
2953 |
\else
|
|
|
2954 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
|
|
|
2955 |
\fi}
|
|
|
2956 |
\else % not a technote
|
|
|
2957 |
\def\ps@headings{%
|
|
|
2958 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
2959 |
\def\@oddhead{}
|
|
|
2960 |
\def\@evenhead{}
|
|
|
2961 |
\else
|
|
|
2962 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
|
|
|
2963 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
|
|
|
2964 |
\fi
|
|
|
2965 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
2966 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
|
|
|
2967 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
|
|
|
2968 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
|
|
2969 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
|
|
2970 |
\else
|
|
|
2971 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
|
|
|
2972 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
|
|
|
2973 |
\fi
|
|
|
2974 |
\else
|
|
|
2975 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
|
|
2976 |
\fi}
|
|
|
2977 |
\fi
|
|
|
2978 |
\else % single side
|
|
|
2979 |
\def\ps@headings{%
|
|
|
2980 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
2981 |
\def\@oddhead{}
|
|
|
2982 |
\def\@evenhead{}
|
|
|
2983 |
\else
|
|
|
2984 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
|
|
|
2985 |
\def\@evenhead{}
|
|
|
2986 |
\fi
|
|
|
2987 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
2988 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
|
|
|
2989 |
\def\@evenhead{}
|
|
|
2990 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
|
|
2991 |
\def\@oddfoot{}
|
|
|
2992 |
\else
|
|
|
2993 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}
|
|
|
2994 |
\fi
|
|
|
2995 |
\else
|
|
|
2996 |
\def\@oddfoot{}
|
|
|
2997 |
\fi
|
|
|
2998 |
\def\@evenfoot{}}
|
|
|
2999 |
\fi
|
|
|
3000 |
|
|
|
3001 |
|
|
|
3002 |
% title page style
|
|
|
3003 |
\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
|
|
3004 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
3005 |
\def\@oddhead{}%
|
|
|
3006 |
\def\@evenhead{}%
|
|
|
3007 |
\else
|
|
|
3008 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
|
|
|
3009 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
|
|
|
3010 |
\fi
|
|
|
3011 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
3012 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
|
|
|
3013 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
|
|
|
3014 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
|
|
|
3015 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
|
|
|
3016 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
|
|
|
3017 |
\fi
|
|
|
3018 |
\else
|
|
|
3019 |
% all non-draft mode footers
|
|
|
3020 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
|
|
3021 |
% for title pages that are using a pubid
|
|
|
3022 |
% do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
|
|
|
3023 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
|
|
3024 |
\else
|
|
|
3025 |
\footskip 0pt%
|
|
|
3026 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf
|
|
|
3027 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3028 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3029 |
\else
|
|
|
3030 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3031 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3032 |
\fi
|
|
|
3033 |
\fi
|
|
|
3034 |
\fi
|
|
|
3035 |
\fi}
|
|
|
3036 |
|
|
|
3037 |
|
|
|
3038 |
% peer review cover page style
|
|
|
3039 |
\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%
|
|
|
3040 |
\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%
|
|
|
3041 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
|
|
3042 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
3043 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
|
|
|
3044 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
|
|
|
3045 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
|
|
|
3046 |
\fi
|
|
|
3047 |
\else
|
|
|
3048 |
% non-draft mode footers
|
|
|
3049 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
|
|
3050 |
\footskip 0pt%
|
|
|
3051 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3052 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3053 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3054 |
\else
|
|
|
3055 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3056 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
|
|
3057 |
\fi
|
|
|
3058 |
\fi
|
|
|
3059 |
\fi}
|
|
|
3060 |
|
|
|
3061 |
|
|
|
3062 |
% start with empty headings
|
|
|
3063 |
\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}
|
|
|
3064 |
|
|
|
3065 |
|
|
|
3066 |
%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same
|
|
|
3067 |
%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}.
|
|
|
3068 |
%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
|
|
|
3069 |
%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
|
|
|
3070 |
%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
|
|
|
3071 |
%% arguments to \markboth.
|
|
|
3072 |
\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%
|
|
|
3073 |
\def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
|
|
|
3074 |
\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
|
|
|
3075 |
|
|
|
3076 |
\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
|
|
|
3077 |
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
|
|
3078 |
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
|
|
3079 |
\space\number\day, \number\year}
|
|
|
3080 |
|
|
|
3081 |
|
|
|
3082 |
|
|
|
3083 |
|
|
|
3084 |
%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
|
|
|
3085 |
%%
|
|
|
3086 |
%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
|
|
|
3087 |
%
|
|
|
3088 |
%
|
|
|
3089 |
% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
|
|
|
3090 |
\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
|
|
|
3091 |
\let\@citea\@empty
|
|
|
3092 |
\@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
|
|
|
3093 |
{\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
|
|
|
3094 |
\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
|
|
|
3095 |
\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
|
|
|
3096 |
\@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
|
|
|
3097 |
\G@refundefinedtrue
|
|
|
3098 |
\@latex@warning
|
|
|
3099 |
{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
|
|
|
3100 |
{\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
|
|
|
3101 |
|
|
|
3102 |
% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
|
|
|
3103 |
% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
|
|
|
3104 |
% following format controls are already defined and will not
|
|
|
3105 |
% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
|
|
|
3106 |
% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
|
|
|
3107 |
% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
|
|
|
3108 |
% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
|
|
|
3109 |
% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
|
|
|
3110 |
% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
|
|
|
3111 |
% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
|
|
|
3112 |
% that \cite.
|
|
|
3113 |
% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
|
|
|
3114 |
% to produce the IEEE style.
|
|
|
3115 |
\def\citepunct{], [}
|
|
|
3116 |
\def\citedash{]--[}
|
|
|
3117 |
|
|
|
3118 |
% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
|
|
|
3119 |
\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
|
|
|
3120 |
|
|
|
3121 |
% V1.6 class files should always provide these
|
|
|
3122 |
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
|
|
|
3123 |
\let\@openbib@code\@empty
|
|
|
3124 |
|
|
|
3125 |
|
|
|
3126 |
% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
|
|
|
3127 |
% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
|
|
|
3128 |
% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
|
|
|
3129 |
% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
|
|
|
3130 |
% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
|
|
|
3131 |
\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
|
|
|
3132 |
\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
|
|
|
3133 |
\@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
|
|
|
3134 |
\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
|
|
|
3135 |
\if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
|
|
|
3136 |
\@esphack}
|
|
|
3137 |
|
|
|
3138 |
% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before
|
|
|
3139 |
% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
|
|
|
3140 |
% the columns on the last page
|
|
|
3141 |
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that
|
|
|
3142 |
% the command is not executed
|
|
|
3143 |
\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
|
|
|
3144 |
|
|
|
3145 |
% allow the user to alter the triggered command
|
|
|
3146 |
\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
|
|
|
3147 |
|
|
|
3148 |
% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
|
|
|
3149 |
% command is executed
|
|
|
3150 |
\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
|
|
|
3151 |
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
|
|
|
3152 |
|
|
|
3153 |
% trigger command at the given reference
|
|
|
3154 |
\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
|
|
|
3155 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
|
|
|
3156 |
\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
|
|
|
3157 |
|
|
|
3158 |
|
|
|
3159 |
\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
|
|
|
3160 |
|
|
|
3161 |
% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
|
|
|
3162 |
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
|
|
|
3163 |
|
|
|
3164 |
% controls bib item spacing
|
|
|
3165 |
\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
|
|
|
3166 |
|
|
|
3167 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
|
|
|
3168 |
|
|
|
3169 |
|
|
|
3170 |
\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
|
|
|
3171 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
|
|
|
3172 |
% V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
|
|
|
3173 |
\footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
|
|
|
3174 |
\list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
|
|
|
3175 |
{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
|
|
|
3176 |
\leftmargin\labelwidth
|
|
|
3177 |
\advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
|
|
|
3178 |
\itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
|
|
|
3179 |
\usecounter{enumiv}%
|
|
|
3180 |
\let\p@enumiv\@empty
|
|
|
3181 |
\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
|
|
|
3182 |
\let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
|
|
|
3183 |
\def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
|
|
|
3184 |
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
|
|
|
3185 |
% originally:
|
|
|
3186 |
% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
|
|
|
3187 |
% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
|
|
|
3188 |
% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
|
|
|
3189 |
% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
|
|
|
3190 |
% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography,
|
|
|
3191 |
% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish.
|
|
|
3192 |
% MDS 11/2000
|
|
|
3193 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
|
|
|
3194 |
\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
|
|
|
3195 |
\sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
|
|
|
3196 |
\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
|
|
|
3197 |
|
|
|
3198 |
|
|
|
3199 |
|
|
|
3200 |
|
|
|
3201 |
% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
|
|
|
3202 |
%
|
|
|
3203 |
%
|
|
|
3204 |
% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author
|
|
|
3205 |
% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
|
|
|
3206 |
\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
|
|
|
3207 |
|
|
|
3208 |
|
|
|
3209 |
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
|
|
|
3210 |
% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
|
|
|
3211 |
% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{}
|
|
|
3212 |
% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you
|
|
|
3213 |
% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
|
|
|
3214 |
% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
|
|
|
3215 |
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
|
|
|
3216 |
% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
|
|
|
3217 |
% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
|
|
|
3218 |
% with the text above.
|
|
|
3219 |
% V1.7 make this a robust command
|
|
|
3220 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
|
|
|
3221 |
\mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
|
|
|
3222 |
\or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
|
|
|
3223 |
|
|
|
3224 |
|
|
|
3225 |
% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
|
|
|
3226 |
%
|
|
|
3227 |
% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
|
|
3228 |
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
|
|
|
3229 |
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
|
|
|
3230 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\normalsize}
|
|
|
3231 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize}
|
|
|
3232 |
|
|
|
3233 |
% The default if the user does not use an author block
|
|
|
3234 |
\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
|
|
|
3235 |
|
|
|
3236 |
% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
|
|
|
3237 |
% can be negative
|
|
|
3238 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
|
|
|
3239 |
% compsoc conferences need more space here
|
|
|
3240 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
|
|
|
3241 |
|
|
|
3242 |
% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
|
|
3243 |
% This can be negative.
|
|
|
3244 |
% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
|
|
|
3245 |
% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
|
|
|
3246 |
% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
|
|
|
3247 |
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
|
|
|
3248 |
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
|
|
|
3249 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
|
|
|
3250 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
|
|
|
3251 |
% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
|
|
3252 |
% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make
|
|
|
3253 |
% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
|
|
|
3254 |
% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders,
|
|
|
3255 |
% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
|
|
|
3256 |
% these above 2.6ex
|
|
|
3257 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
|
|
|
3258 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
|
|
|
3259 |
|
|
|
3260 |
% This tracks the required strut size.
|
|
|
3261 |
% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
|
|
|
3262 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
|
|
|
3263 |
|
|
|
3264 |
% variables to retain font size and style across groups
|
|
|
3265 |
% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
|
|
|
3266 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
|
|
|
3267 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
|
|
|
3268 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
|
|
|
3269 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
|
|
|
3270 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
|
|
|
3271 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
|
|
|
3272 |
|
|
|
3273 |
% saves the current font attributes
|
|
|
3274 |
\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
|
|
|
3275 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
|
|
|
3276 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
|
|
|
3277 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
|
|
|
3278 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
|
|
|
3279 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
|
|
|
3280 |
|
|
|
3281 |
% restores the saved font attributes
|
|
|
3282 |
\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
|
|
|
3283 |
\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
|
|
|
3284 |
\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
|
|
|
3285 |
\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
|
|
|
3286 |
\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
|
|
|
3287 |
\selectfont}
|
|
|
3288 |
|
|
|
3289 |
|
|
|
3290 |
% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
|
|
|
3291 |
\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
|
|
|
3292 |
|
|
|
3293 |
|
|
|
3294 |
% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
|
|
|
3295 |
% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
|
|
|
3296 |
% within the halign environment.
|
|
|
3297 |
% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
|
|
|
3298 |
% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
|
|
|
3299 |
% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
|
|
|
3300 |
\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
|
|
|
3301 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
|
|
3302 |
\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
|
|
|
3303 |
|
|
|
3304 |
|
|
|
3305 |
% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations.
|
|
|
3306 |
% Makes formatting easy for conferences
|
|
|
3307 |
%
|
|
|
3308 |
% use real definitions in conference mode
|
|
|
3309 |
% name block
|
|
|
3310 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
|
|
|
3311 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
|
|
|
3312 |
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
|
|
|
3313 |
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
|
|
|
3314 |
% do a spacer row if needed
|
|
|
3315 |
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
|
|
|
3316 |
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
|
|
|
3317 |
%restore the correct strut value
|
|
|
3318 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
|
|
|
3319 |
% input the author names
|
|
|
3320 |
#1%
|
|
|
3321 |
% end the row if the user did not already
|
|
|
3322 |
\crcr}
|
|
|
3323 |
% spacer row for names
|
|
|
3324 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
|
|
|
3325 |
%
|
|
|
3326 |
% affiliation block
|
|
|
3327 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
|
|
|
3328 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
|
|
|
3329 |
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
|
|
|
3330 |
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
|
|
|
3331 |
% do a spacer row if needed
|
|
|
3332 |
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
|
|
|
3333 |
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
|
|
|
3334 |
%restore the correct strut value
|
|
|
3335 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
|
|
|
3336 |
% input the author affiliations
|
|
|
3337 |
#1%
|
|
|
3338 |
% end the row if the user did not already
|
|
|
3339 |
\crcr}
|
|
|
3340 |
% spacer row for affiliations
|
|
|
3341 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
|
|
|
3342 |
|
|
|
3343 |
|
|
|
3344 |
% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
|
|
|
3345 |
% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
|
|
|
3346 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
3347 |
\else
|
|
|
3348 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
|
|
|
3349 |
% not conference or peerreviewca mode
|
|
|
3350 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
|
|
|
3351 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
|
|
|
3352 |
\fi
|
|
|
3353 |
\fi
|
|
|
3354 |
|
|
|
3355 |
|
|
|
3356 |
|
|
|
3357 |
% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
|
|
|
3358 |
\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
|
|
|
3359 |
\lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
|
|
|
3360 |
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
3361 |
\baselineskip=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
3362 |
\@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
|
|
|
3363 |
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
|
|
3364 |
\let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
|
|
|
3365 |
\tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
|
|
|
3366 |
\everycr{}% ensure no problems here
|
|
|
3367 |
\@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
|
|
|
3368 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
|
|
|
3369 |
\vtop\bgroup%vtop box
|
|
|
3370 |
\halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
|
|
|
3371 |
\hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
|
|
|
3372 |
|
|
|
3373 |
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
|
|
|
3374 |
\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
|
|
|
3375 |
|
|
|
3376 |
% handle bogus star form
|
|
|
3377 |
\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
|
|
|
3378 |
|
|
|
3379 |
% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
|
|
|
3380 |
\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
|
|
|
3381 |
|
|
|
3382 |
% end the line and do the optional spacer
|
|
|
3383 |
\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
|
|
|
3384 |
|
|
|
3385 |
|
|
|
3386 |
|
|
|
3387 |
% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
|
|
|
3388 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
|
|
|
3389 |
\@IEEEWARNandtrue
|
|
|
3390 |
|
|
|
3391 |
% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
|
|
|
3392 |
% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
|
|
|
3393 |
% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
|
|
|
3394 |
\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
|
|
|
3395 |
|
|
|
3396 |
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
|
|
|
3397 |
when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
|
|
|
3398 |
|
|
|
3399 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
|
|
3400 |
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
|
|
3401 |
\fi
|
|
|
3402 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
|
|
|
3403 |
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
|
|
3404 |
\fi
|
|
|
3405 |
|
|
|
3406 |
|
|
|
3407 |
% page clearing command
|
|
|
3408 |
% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
|
|
|
3409 |
% for the inserted blank pages
|
|
|
3410 |
\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
|
|
|
3411 |
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
3412 |
|
|
|
3413 |
|
|
|
3414 |
% user command to invoke the title page
|
|
|
3415 |
\def\maketitle{\par%
|
|
|
3416 |
\begingroup%
|
|
|
3417 |
\normalfont%
|
|
|
3418 |
\def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty
|
|
|
3419 |
\def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
|
|
|
3420 |
\let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
|
|
|
3421 |
\footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines
|
|
|
3422 |
\footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
|
|
|
3423 |
% V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
|
|
|
3424 |
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
|
|
|
3425 |
\normalsize%
|
|
|
3426 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
|
|
3427 |
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
|
|
3428 |
\thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
|
|
|
3429 |
\else
|
|
|
3430 |
\if@twocolumn%
|
|
|
3431 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
|
|
|
3432 |
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
|
|
3433 |
\else
|
|
|
3434 |
\twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
|
|
|
3435 |
\fi
|
|
|
3436 |
\else
|
|
|
3437 |
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
|
|
3438 |
\fi
|
|
|
3439 |
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
|
|
|
3440 |
\fi
|
|
|
3441 |
% pullup page for pubid if used.
|
|
|
3442 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
|
|
3443 |
\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
|
|
|
3444 |
\fi
|
|
|
3445 |
\endgroup
|
|
|
3446 |
\setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
|
|
|
3447 |
\gdef\@thanks{}%
|
|
|
3448 |
% v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
|
|
|
3449 |
% \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
|
|
|
3450 |
\let\thanks\relax}
|
|
|
3451 |
|
|
|
3452 |
|
|
|
3453 |
|
|
|
3454 |
% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext
|
|
|
3455 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
|
|
|
3456 |
|
|
|
3457 |
|
|
|
3458 |
% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
|
|
|
3459 |
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
|
|
|
3460 |
% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
|
|
|
3461 |
\def\@maketitle{\newpage
|
|
|
3462 |
\begin{center}%
|
|
|
3463 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
|
|
|
3464 |
{\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
|
|
|
3465 |
\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
|
|
3466 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par
|
|
|
3467 |
\hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
|
|
3468 |
\else% not a technote
|
|
|
3469 |
\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 0\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
|
|
3470 |
\bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip 1.0em\par%
|
|
|
3471 |
% V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
|
|
|
3472 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
|
|
3473 |
{\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
|
|
3474 |
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
|
|
|
3475 |
\else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
|
|
|
3476 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
|
|
|
3477 |
% peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
|
|
|
3478 |
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
|
|
3479 |
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
|
|
|
3480 |
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
|
|
3481 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
|
|
|
3482 |
\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
|
|
3483 |
\else% journal or peerreview
|
|
|
3484 |
{\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
|
|
|
3485 |
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
|
|
3486 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
|
|
|
3487 |
\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
|
|
3488 |
\fi
|
|
|
3489 |
\fi
|
|
|
3490 |
\fi\end{center}}
|
|
|
3491 |
|
|
|
3492 |
|
|
|
3493 |
|
|
|
3494 |
% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
|
|
|
3495 |
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
|
|
|
3496 |
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
|
|
|
3497 |
\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
|
|
|
3498 |
|
|
|
3499 |
% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
|
|
|
3500 |
% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
|
|
|
3501 |
\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
|
|
|
3502 |
|
|
|
3503 |
|
|
|
3504 |
\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
|
|
|
3505 |
\protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
|
|
|
3506 |
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
|
|
|
3507 |
\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
|
|
|
3508 |
\let\@thanks\@empty
|
|
|
3509 |
|
|
|
3510 |
% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
|
|
|
3511 |
\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
|
|
|
3512 |
|
|
|
3513 |
|
|
|
3514 |
% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
|
|
|
3515 |
% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
|
|
|
3516 |
\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
|
|
|
3517 |
\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
|
|
|
3518 |
\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
|
|
|
3519 |
|
|
|
3520 |
|
|
|
3521 |
% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
|
|
|
3522 |
\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
|
|
|
3523 |
|
|
|
3524 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3525 |
% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
|
|
|
3526 |
% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
|
|
|
3527 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
|
|
|
3528 |
\protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
|
|
|
3529 |
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
|
|
|
3530 |
{\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
|
|
|
3531 |
\protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
|
|
|
3532 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
|
|
|
3533 |
\else
|
|
|
3534 |
% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
|
|
|
3535 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
|
|
|
3536 |
% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
|
|
|
3537 |
\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
|
|
|
3538 |
{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
|
|
|
3539 |
% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
|
|
|
3540 |
\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
|
|
|
3541 |
\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
|
|
|
3542 |
\fi
|
|
|
3543 |
|
|
|
3544 |
|
|
|
3545 |
% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
|
|
|
3546 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
|
|
3547 |
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
|
|
|
3548 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
|
|
|
3549 |
\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
|
|
|
3550 |
\else
|
|
|
3551 |
\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
|
|
|
3552 |
\fi
|
|
|
3553 |
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
|
|
|
3554 |
\else
|
|
|
3555 |
% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
|
|
|
3556 |
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
|
|
|
3557 |
\fi
|
|
|
3558 |
|
|
|
3559 |
% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
|
|
|
3560 |
\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
|
|
|
3561 |
\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
|
|
|
3562 |
\end{center}}
|
|
|
3563 |
|
|
|
3564 |
|
|
|
3565 |
|
|
|
3566 |
% V1.6
|
|
|
3567 |
% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
|
|
|
3568 |
% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
|
|
|
3569 |
% of two column text (technotes).
|
|
|
3570 |
\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
|
|
|
3571 |
% adjust spacing to next text
|
|
|
3572 |
% v1.6b handle peer review papers
|
|
|
3573 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
|
|
3574 |
% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
|
|
|
3575 |
% regardless of the other paper modes
|
|
|
3576 |
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
|
|
|
3577 |
\else
|
|
|
3578 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
|
|
|
3579 |
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
|
|
|
3580 |
\else%
|
|
|
3581 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
|
|
|
3582 |
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
|
|
|
3583 |
\else% journal uses more space
|
|
|
3584 |
\vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
|
|
|
3585 |
\fi
|
|
|
3586 |
\fi
|
|
|
3587 |
\fi}}
|
|
|
3588 |
|
|
|
3589 |
|
|
|
3590 |
% V1.6
|
|
|
3591 |
% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors
|
|
|
3592 |
% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two
|
|
|
3593 |
% column text (most common)
|
|
|
3594 |
% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
|
|
|
3595 |
% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
|
|
|
3596 |
% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
|
|
|
3597 |
% text on the titlepage
|
|
|
3598 |
% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
|
|
|
3599 |
\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
|
|
|
3600 |
% we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
|
|
|
3601 |
\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
|
|
|
3602 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
|
|
|
3603 |
\normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
|
|
|
3604 |
\let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
|
|
|
3605 |
\let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
|
|
|
3606 |
% set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
|
|
|
3607 |
% the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
|
|
|
3608 |
% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
|
|
|
3609 |
% lengthened
|
|
|
3610 |
% default to journal values
|
|
|
3611 |
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3612 |
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3613 |
% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
|
|
|
3614 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
|
|
|
3615 |
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3616 |
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3617 |
\fi
|
|
|
3618 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
|
|
|
3619 |
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3620 |
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3621 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3622 |
% get the height that the title will take up
|
|
|
3623 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
|
|
3624 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
|
|
|
3625 |
\else
|
|
|
3626 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
|
|
|
3627 |
\fi
|
|
|
3628 |
\@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
|
|
|
3629 |
% add the height of the page textheight
|
|
|
3630 |
\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
|
|
|
3631 |
% correct for title pages using pubid
|
|
|
3632 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
|
|
3633 |
% peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
|
|
|
3634 |
% And the cover page uses a static spacer.
|
|
|
3635 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
|
|
|
3636 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3637 |
% subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
|
|
|
3638 |
\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
|
|
|
3639 |
% \topskip takes away some too
|
|
|
3640 |
\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
|
|
|
3641 |
% calculate the column height of the main text for lines
|
|
|
3642 |
% now we calculate the main text height as if holding
|
|
|
3643 |
% an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
|
|
|
3644 |
% and discard any excess fractional remainder
|
|
|
3645 |
% we subtracted the first line, because the first line
|
|
|
3646 |
% is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
|
|
|
3647 |
% rest of the lines.
|
|
|
3648 |
\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
|
|
|
3649 |
\divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
3650 |
\multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
3651 |
% now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
|
|
|
3652 |
% have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
|
|
|
3653 |
% a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
|
|
|
3654 |
% number of normal size lines
|
|
|
3655 |
% we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
|
|
|
3656 |
% need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
|
|
|
3657 |
\let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
|
|
|
3658 |
\advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
|
|
|
3659 |
\advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
3660 |
% this is the calculated height of the spacer
|
|
|
3661 |
% we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
|
|
|
3662 |
% need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
|
|
|
3663 |
\let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
|
|
|
3664 |
\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
|
|
|
3665 |
% we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
|
|
|
3666 |
\ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
|
|
|
3667 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
|
|
|
3668 |
% if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
|
|
|
3669 |
\ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
|
|
|
3670 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
3671 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3672 |
\else%
|
|
|
3673 |
% go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
|
|
|
3674 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
|
|
|
3675 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
|
|
|
3676 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3677 |
% set the calculated rigid spacer
|
|
|
3678 |
\vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
|
|
|
3679 |
|
|
|
3680 |
|
|
|
3681 |
|
|
|
3682 |
% V1.6
|
|
|
3683 |
% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
|
|
|
3684 |
% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
|
|
|
3685 |
% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
|
|
|
3686 |
\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
|
|
|
3687 |
\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
|
|
|
3688 |
|
|
|
3689 |
% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
|
|
|
3690 |
% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
|
|
|
3691 |
% in the dynamic sizer.
|
|
|
3692 |
\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax
|
|
|
3693 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}
|
|
|
3694 |
% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if
|
|
|
3695 |
% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed
|
|
|
3696 |
% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.
|
|
|
3697 |
\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%
|
|
|
3698 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf
|
|
|
3699 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi
|
|
|
3700 |
\else% or if not compsoc
|
|
|
3701 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}
|
|
|
3702 |
|
|
|
3703 |
|
|
|
3704 |
% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
|
|
|
3705 |
% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
|
|
|
3706 |
\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
|
|
|
3707 |
\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
|
|
|
3708 |
\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
|
|
|
3709 |
|
|
|
3710 |
|
|
|
3711 |
% abstract and keywords are in \small, except
|
|
|
3712 |
% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
|
|
|
3713 |
% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
|
|
|
3714 |
% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
|
|
|
3715 |
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
|
|
|
3716 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
|
|
3717 |
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
|
|
|
3718 |
\fi
|
|
|
3719 |
|
|
|
3720 |
% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
|
|
|
3721 |
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
|
|
|
3722 |
%\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
|
|
|
3723 |
|
|
|
3724 |
|
|
|
3725 |
|
|
|
3726 |
|
|
|
3727 |
% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
|
|
|
3728 |
% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
|
|
|
3729 |
\def\abstract{\normalfont
|
|
|
3730 |
\if@twocolumn
|
|
|
3731 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
|
|
|
3732 |
\else
|
|
|
3733 |
\begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
|
|
3734 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
|
|
3735 |
% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in
|
|
|
3736 |
% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
|
|
|
3737 |
\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
|
|
|
3738 |
\normalfont\normalsize}
|
|
|
3739 |
|
|
|
3740 |
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
|
|
|
3741 |
\if@twocolumn
|
|
|
3742 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}-\relax
|
|
|
3743 |
\else
|
|
|
3744 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
|
|
3745 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
|
|
3746 |
\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
|
|
|
3747 |
\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
|
|
|
3748 |
\normalfont\normalsize}
|
|
|
3749 |
|
|
|
3750 |
% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
|
|
|
3751 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3752 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
|
|
3753 |
\def\abstract{\normalfont
|
|
|
3754 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
|
|
|
3755 |
\if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
|
|
3756 |
\par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
|
|
3757 |
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
|
|
|
3758 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
|
|
|
3759 |
\if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
|
|
3760 |
\par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
|
|
3761 |
\else% compsoc not conference
|
|
|
3762 |
\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
|
|
|
3763 |
\if@twocolumn
|
|
|
3764 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
|
|
|
3765 |
\else
|
|
|
3766 |
\begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
|
|
3767 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
|
|
3768 |
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
|
|
|
3769 |
\if@twocolumn
|
|
|
3770 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
|
|
|
3771 |
\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
|
|
3772 |
\else
|
|
|
3773 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
|
|
3774 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
|
|
3775 |
\fi
|
|
|
3776 |
\fi
|
|
|
3777 |
|
|
|
3778 |
|
|
|
3779 |
|
|
|
3780 |
% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
|
|
|
3781 |
% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
|
|
|
3782 |
%
|
|
|
3783 |
% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
|
|
|
3784 |
% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
|
|
|
3785 |
% affect the formatting of the text
|
|
|
3786 |
\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
|
|
|
3787 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
|
|
|
3788 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
|
|
|
3789 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
|
|
|
3790 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
|
|
|
3791 |
\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
|
|
|
3792 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
|
|
|
3793 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
|
|
3794 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3795 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
|
|
|
3796 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
|
|
3797 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3798 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
|
|
|
3799 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
|
|
3800 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3801 |
% a control space will come in as a macro
|
|
|
3802 |
% when it is the last one on a line
|
|
|
3803 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
|
|
|
3804 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
|
|
3805 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3806 |
% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
|
|
|
3807 |
% else spit it out and stop gobbling
|
|
|
3808 |
\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
|
|
|
3809 |
\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
|
|
|
3810 |
\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
|
|
|
3811 |
|
|
|
3812 |
|
|
|
3813 |
|
|
|
3814 |
|
|
|
3815 |
% TITLING OF SECTIONS
|
|
|
3816 |
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are
|
|
|
3817 |
% part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
|
|
|
3818 |
% spacing from section number to title
|
|
|
3819 |
% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
|
|
|
3820 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3821 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
3822 |
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
|
|
|
3823 |
\fi\fi
|
|
|
3824 |
|
|
|
3825 |
|
|
|
3826 |
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
|
|
|
3827 |
|
|
|
3828 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3829 |
% compsoc journals need extra spacing
|
|
|
3830 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
|
|
|
3831 |
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
|
|
|
3832 |
\fi\fi
|
|
|
3833 |
|
|
|
3834 |
%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
|
|
|
3835 |
%and use \@@par rather than \par
|
|
|
3836 |
\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
|
|
|
3837 |
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
|
|
|
3838 |
\let\@svsec\@empty
|
|
|
3839 |
\else
|
|
|
3840 |
\refstepcounter{#1}%
|
|
|
3841 |
% load section label and spacer into \@svsec
|
|
|
3842 |
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
|
|
|
3843 |
\fi%
|
|
|
3844 |
\@tempskipa #5\relax
|
|
|
3845 |
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
|
|
|
3846 |
\begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
|
|
|
3847 |
\noindent % subsections are NOT indented
|
|
|
3848 |
% print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
|
|
|
3849 |
% IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
|
|
|
3850 |
{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
|
|
|
3851 |
\endgroup
|
|
|
3852 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
|
|
|
3853 |
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
|
|
|
3854 |
\else % printout low level headings
|
|
|
3855 |
% svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
|
|
|
3856 |
% got rid of sectionmark stuff
|
|
|
3857 |
\def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
|
|
|
3858 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
|
|
|
3859 |
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
|
|
|
3860 |
\fi%skip down
|
|
|
3861 |
\@xsect{#5}}
|
|
|
3862 |
|
|
|
3863 |
|
|
|
3864 |
% section* handler
|
|
|
3865 |
%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
|
|
|
3866 |
%and use \@@par rather than \par
|
|
|
3867 |
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
|
|
|
3868 |
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
|
|
|
3869 |
%\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
|
|
|
3870 |
% IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
|
|
|
3871 |
\begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
|
|
|
3872 |
% svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
|
|
|
3873 |
\else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
|
|
|
3874 |
\@xsect{#3}}
|
|
|
3875 |
|
|
|
3876 |
|
|
|
3877 |
%% SECTION heading spacing and font
|
|
|
3878 |
%%
|
|
|
3879 |
% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
|
|
|
3880 |
% (for \@sect) #2 - section level
|
|
|
3881 |
% #3 - section heading indent
|
|
|
3882 |
% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
|
|
|
3883 |
% If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
|
|
|
3884 |
% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
|
|
|
3885 |
% negative: amount to indent main text after heading
|
|
|
3886 |
% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
|
|
|
3887 |
% #6 - font control
|
|
|
3888 |
% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
|
|
|
3889 |
% trouble when you do something like:
|
|
|
3890 |
% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ...
|
|
|
3891 |
% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
|
|
|
3892 |
% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
|
|
|
3893 |
% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
|
|
|
3894 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
|
|
3895 |
% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
|
|
|
3896 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
|
|
|
3897 |
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
|
|
|
3898 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
|
|
|
3899 |
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
|
|
3900 |
\else % for journals
|
|
|
3901 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
|
|
|
3902 |
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
|
|
|
3903 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
|
|
|
3904 |
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
|
|
3905 |
\fi
|
|
|
3906 |
|
|
|
3907 |
% for both journals and conferences
|
|
|
3908 |
% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
|
|
|
3909 |
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
|
|
3910 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
|
|
3911 |
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
|
|
3912 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
|
|
3913 |
|
|
|
3914 |
|
|
|
3915 |
% compsoc
|
|
|
3916 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3917 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
3918 |
% compsoc conference
|
|
|
3919 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3920 |
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
|
|
|
3921 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3922 |
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
|
|
|
3923 |
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
|
|
3924 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
|
|
|
3925 |
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
|
|
3926 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
|
|
|
3927 |
\else% compsoc journals
|
|
|
3928 |
% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
|
|
|
3929 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
|
|
|
3930 |
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
|
|
|
3931 |
% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
|
|
|
3932 |
% I have to look up an example.
|
|
|
3933 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
|
|
|
3934 |
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
|
|
|
3935 |
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
|
|
|
3936 |
{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
|
|
|
3937 |
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
|
|
|
3938 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
|
|
|
3939 |
\fi\fi
|
|
|
3940 |
|
|
|
3941 |
|
|
|
3942 |
|
|
|
3943 |
|
|
|
3944 |
%% ENVIRONMENTS
|
|
|
3945 |
% "box" symbols at end of proofs
|
|
|
3946 |
\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
|
|
|
3947 |
% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
|
|
|
3948 |
\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
|
|
|
3949 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
3950 |
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc
|
|
|
3951 |
\else
|
|
|
3952 |
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
|
|
|
3953 |
\fi
|
|
|
3954 |
|
|
|
3955 |
% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
|
|
|
3956 |
% for an optional argument.
|
|
|
3957 |
\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
|
|
|
3958 |
\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}
|
|
|
3959 |
\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}
|
|
|
3960 |
|
|
|
3961 |
|
|
|
3962 |
%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
|
|
|
3963 |
\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
|
|
|
3964 |
\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
|
|
|
3965 |
\item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
|
|
|
3966 |
\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
|
|
|
3967 |
% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
|
|
|
3968 |
% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
|
|
|
3969 |
\item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
|
|
|
3970 |
% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
|
|
|
3971 |
% lines below.
|
|
|
3972 |
\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
|
|
|
3973 |
|
|
|
3974 |
% V1.6
|
|
|
3975 |
% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
|
|
|
3976 |
% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
|
|
|
3977 |
% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
|
|
|
3978 |
% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
|
|
|
3979 |
% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
|
|
|
3980 |
% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
|
|
|
3981 |
%
|
|
|
3982 |
% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
|
|
|
3983 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
|
|
|
3984 |
% string macro
|
|
|
3985 |
\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
|
|
|
3986 |
|
|
|
3987 |
% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
|
|
|
3988 |
% if section in_counter is used
|
|
|
3989 |
\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
|
|
|
3990 |
\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
|
|
|
3991 |
{\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
|
|
|
3992 |
\edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
|
|
|
3993 |
\ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
|
|
|
3994 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
|
|
|
3995 |
\noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
|
|
|
3996 |
\@thmcounter{#1}}%
|
|
|
3997 |
\else
|
|
|
3998 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
|
|
|
3999 |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
|
|
|
4000 |
\@thmcounter{#1}}%
|
|
|
4001 |
\fi
|
|
|
4002 |
\global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
|
|
|
4003 |
\global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
|
|
|
4004 |
|
|
|
4005 |
|
|
|
4006 |
|
|
|
4007 |
%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
|
|
|
4008 |
\ps@headings
|
|
|
4009 |
\pagenumbering{arabic}
|
|
|
4010 |
|
|
|
4011 |
% normally the page counter starts at 1
|
|
|
4012 |
\setcounter{page}{1}
|
|
|
4013 |
% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
|
|
|
4014 |
% (for duplex printing)
|
|
|
4015 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
|
|
4016 |
\if@twoside
|
|
|
4017 |
\setcounter{page}{-1}
|
|
|
4018 |
\else
|
|
|
4019 |
\setcounter{page}{0}
|
|
|
4020 |
\fi
|
|
|
4021 |
\fi
|
|
|
4022 |
|
|
|
4023 |
% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
|
|
|
4024 |
% needed when single sided
|
|
|
4025 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
|
|
|
4026 |
% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
|
|
|
4027 |
% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
|
|
|
4028 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
|
|
|
4029 |
% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
|
|
|
4030 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
|
|
4031 |
\twocolumn
|
|
|
4032 |
\fi
|
|
|
4033 |
\sloppy
|
|
|
4034 |
\flushbottom
|
|
|
4035 |
\fi
|
|
|
4036 |
|
|
|
4037 |
|
|
|
4038 |
|
|
|
4039 |
|
|
|
4040 |
% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
|
|
|
4041 |
|
|
|
4042 |
% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
|
|
|
4043 |
% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
|
|
|
4044 |
% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
|
|
|
4045 |
% is present or not.
|
|
|
4046 |
% For instance:
|
|
|
4047 |
% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
|
|
|
4048 |
% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
|
|
|
4049 |
% \appendices is invoked.
|
|
|
4050 |
% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
|
|
|
4051 |
% on whether the user specifies a title:
|
|
|
4052 |
% \section{My appendix title}
|
|
|
4053 |
% or not:
|
|
|
4054 |
% \section{}
|
|
|
4055 |
% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
|
|
|
4056 |
% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
|
|
|
4057 |
% contents
|
|
|
4058 |
\begingroup
|
|
|
4059 |
\catcode`\Q=3
|
|
|
4060 |
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
|
|
|
4061 |
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
|
|
|
4062 |
\endgroup
|
|
|
4063 |
% end of \@ifmtarg defs
|
|
|
4064 |
|
|
|
4065 |
|
|
|
4066 |
% V1.7
|
|
|
4067 |
% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
|
|
|
4068 |
% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices
|
|
|
4069 |
% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
|
|
|
4070 |
% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
|
|
|
4071 |
\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
|
|
|
4072 |
\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
|
|
|
4073 |
|
|
|
4074 |
% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
|
|
|
4075 |
% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
|
|
|
4076 |
% argument (title)
|
|
|
4077 |
% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
|
|
|
4078 |
\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
|
|
|
4079 |
\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
|
|
|
4080 |
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%
|
|
|
4081 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%
|
|
|
4082 |
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%
|
|
|
4083 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}
|
|
|
4084 |
|
|
|
4085 |
% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
|
|
|
4086 |
% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
|
|
|
4087 |
% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
|
|
|
4088 |
\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
|
|
|
4089 |
\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
|
|
|
4090 |
|
|
|
4091 |
|
|
|
4092 |
% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
|
|
|
4093 |
% and in the Table of Contents.
|
|
|
4094 |
% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
|
|
|
4095 |
|
|
|
4096 |
% appendix command for one single appendix
|
|
|
4097 |
% normally has no heading. However, if you want a
|
|
|
4098 |
% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
|
|
|
4099 |
% \appendix[Optional Heading]
|
|
|
4100 |
\def\appendix{\relax}
|
|
|
4101 |
\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
|
|
|
4102 |
% v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
|
|
|
4103 |
\gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
|
|
|
4104 |
% v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
|
|
|
4105 |
\xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
|
|
|
4106 |
\setcounter{section}{0}%
|
|
|
4107 |
\setcounter{subsection}{0}%
|
|
|
4108 |
\setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
|
|
|
4109 |
\setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
|
|
|
4110 |
\gdef\thesection{A}%
|
|
|
4111 |
\gdef\thesectiondis{}%
|
|
|
4112 |
\gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
|
|
|
4113 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
|
|
|
4114 |
\refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
|
|
|
4115 |
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
|
|
|
4116 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
|
|
|
4117 |
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%
|
|
|
4118 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
|
|
|
4119 |
% redefine \section command for appendix
|
|
|
4120 |
% leave \section* as is
|
|
|
4121 |
\def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
|
|
|
4122 |
\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
|
|
|
4123 |
% of the normal form
|
|
|
4124 |
}
|
|
|
4125 |
|
|
|
4126 |
|
|
|
4127 |
|
|
|
4128 |
% appendices command for multiple appendices
|
|
|
4129 |
% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
|
|
|
4130 |
% declare the individual appendices
|
|
|
4131 |
\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
|
|
|
4132 |
% v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
|
|
|
4133 |
\gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
|
|
|
4134 |
% v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
|
|
|
4135 |
\xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
|
|
|
4136 |
\setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
|
|
|
4137 |
\setcounter{subsection}{0}%
|
|
|
4138 |
\setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
|
|
|
4139 |
\setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
|
|
|
4140 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
|
|
|
4141 |
\gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
|
|
|
4142 |
\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
|
|
|
4143 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
|
|
|
4144 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
|
|
|
4145 |
\else%
|
|
|
4146 |
\gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
|
|
|
4147 |
\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
|
|
|
4148 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
|
|
|
4149 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
|
|
|
4150 |
\fi%
|
|
|
4151 |
\refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
|
|
|
4152 |
\setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
|
|
|
4153 |
% redefine \section command for appendices
|
|
|
4154 |
% leave \section* as is
|
|
|
4155 |
\def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
|
|
|
4156 |
\refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
|
|
|
4157 |
\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument
|
|
|
4158 |
% of the normal form
|
|
|
4159 |
}
|
|
|
4160 |
|
|
|
4161 |
|
|
|
4162 |
|
|
|
4163 |
% \IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4164 |
% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
|
|
|
4165 |
% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
|
|
|
4166 |
% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
|
|
|
4167 |
% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
|
|
|
4168 |
% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
|
|
|
4169 |
%
|
|
|
4170 |
% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
|
|
|
4171 |
% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
|
|
|
4172 |
% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
|
|
|
4173 |
% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
|
|
|
4174 |
% interword glue will now work as normal.
|
|
|
4175 |
% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
|
|
|
4176 |
%
|
|
|
4177 |
% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
|
|
|
4178 |
%
|
|
|
4179 |
% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
|
|
|
4180 |
% to change the font style.
|
|
|
4181 |
%
|
|
|
4182 |
% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
|
|
|
4183 |
% may need to increase if using decenders
|
|
|
4184 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}
|
|
|
4185 |
% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4186 |
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
|
|
|
4187 |
% be overly cautious
|
|
|
4188 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}
|
|
|
4189 |
% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
|
|
|
4190 |
% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
|
|
|
4191 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}
|
|
|
4192 |
% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
|
|
|
4193 |
% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
|
|
|
4194 |
% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
|
|
|
4195 |
% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
|
|
|
4196 |
% so that it can respond to changes therein.
|
|
|
4197 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}
|
|
|
4198 |
% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
|
|
|
4199 |
% can take zero or one argument.
|
|
|
4200 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}
|
|
|
4201 |
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
|
|
|
4202 |
% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
|
|
|
4203 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
|
|
|
4204 |
% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
|
|
|
4205 |
% can take zero or one argument.
|
|
|
4206 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}
|
|
|
4207 |
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
|
|
|
4208 |
% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
|
|
|
4209 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
|
|
|
4210 |
% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
|
|
|
4211 |
% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
|
|
|
4212 |
% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called.
|
|
|
4213 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}
|
|
|
4214 |
% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
|
|
|
4215 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}
|
|
|
4216 |
% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
|
|
|
4217 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}
|
|
|
4218 |
|
|
|
4219 |
% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
|
|
|
4220 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
4221 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
|
|
|
4222 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
|
|
|
4223 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
|
|
|
4224 |
\fi
|
|
|
4225 |
|
|
|
4226 |
% definition of \IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4227 |
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
|
|
|
4228 |
%
|
|
|
4229 |
% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
|
|
|
4230 |
% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
|
|
|
4231 |
% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
|
|
|
4232 |
% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
|
|
|
4233 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
|
|
|
4234 |
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
|
|
|
4235 |
% on a new one
|
|
|
4236 |
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
|
|
|
4237 |
% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
|
|
|
4238 |
% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
|
|
|
4239 |
\noindent
|
|
|
4240 |
% calculate the desired height of the big letter
|
|
|
4241 |
% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
|
|
|
4242 |
% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
|
|
|
4243 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
|
|
|
4244 |
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
|
|
|
4245 |
% extract the name of the current font in bold
|
|
|
4246 |
% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
|
|
|
4247 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
|
|
|
4248 |
{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
|
|
|
4249 |
\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
|
|
|
4250 |
% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
|
|
|
4251 |
% height of the drop letter
|
|
|
4252 |
\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
|
|
|
4253 |
% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
|
|
|
4254 |
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
|
|
4255 |
% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
|
|
|
4256 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
|
|
|
4257 |
% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
|
|
|
4258 |
% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
|
|
|
4259 |
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
|
|
|
4260 |
\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
|
|
|
4261 |
\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
|
|
|
4262 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
|
|
|
4263 |
\fi%
|
|
|
4264 |
% and store it as a counter
|
|
|
4265 |
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
|
|
|
4266 |
% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
|
|
|
4267 |
% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
|
|
|
4268 |
% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
|
|
|
4269 |
% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
|
|
4270 |
% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
|
|
4271 |
% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
|
|
|
4272 |
% division. Hence the use of the counters.
|
|
|
4273 |
% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
|
|
|
4274 |
% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
|
|
|
4275 |
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
|
|
|
4276 |
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
|
|
|
4277 |
% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
|
|
|
4278 |
% floating point values
|
|
|
4279 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
|
|
4280 |
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
|
|
4281 |
% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
|
|
|
4282 |
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
|
|
|
4283 |
% big letter.
|
|
|
4284 |
\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
|
|
|
4285 |
% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
|
|
|
4286 |
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
|
|
|
4287 |
% hanging indent
|
|
|
4288 |
\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
|
|
|
4289 |
\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
|
|
|
4290 |
% end of the isolated calculation environment
|
|
|
4291 |
% add in the extra clearance we want
|
|
|
4292 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
|
|
|
4293 |
% add in the optional offset
|
|
|
4294 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
|
|
|
4295 |
% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
|
|
|
4296 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
|
|
4297 |
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
|
|
|
4298 |
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
|
|
|
4299 |
% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
|
|
|
4300 |
% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
|
|
|
4301 |
% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
|
|
|
4302 |
% text won't be displaced by it.
|
|
|
4303 |
\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
|
|
|
4304 |
\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
|
|
|
4305 |
\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
|
|
|
4306 |
\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
|
|
|
4307 |
\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
|
|
|
4308 |
{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
|
|
|
4309 |
|
|
|
4310 |
|
|
|
4311 |
|
|
|
4312 |
|
|
|
4313 |
|
|
|
4314 |
|
|
|
4315 |
% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
|
|
|
4316 |
% than the specified space of argument one
|
|
|
4317 |
% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
|
|
|
4318 |
% and issue a \newpage
|
|
|
4319 |
%
|
|
|
4320 |
% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
|
|
|
4321 |
%
|
|
|
4322 |
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
|
|
|
4323 |
% be overly cautious
|
|
|
4324 |
% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
|
|
|
4325 |
% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
|
|
|
4326 |
% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
|
|
|
4327 |
% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
|
|
|
4328 |
\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
|
|
|
4329 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
|
|
|
4330 |
\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
|
|
|
4331 |
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
|
|
|
4332 |
\newpage%
|
|
|
4333 |
\fi\endgroup}
|
|
|
4334 |
|
|
|
4335 |
|
|
|
4336 |
|
|
|
4337 |
% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
|
|
|
4338 |
% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
|
|
|
4339 |
% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
|
|
|
4340 |
% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a
|
|
|
4341 |
% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
|
|
|
4342 |
% MDS 7/2001
|
|
|
4343 |
% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
|
|
|
4344 |
\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
|
|
|
4345 |
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
|
|
|
4346 |
|
|
|
4347 |
% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
|
|
|
4348 |
% and not just the previous section
|
|
|
4349 |
\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
|
|
|
4350 |
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
|
|
|
4351 |
|
|
|
4352 |
% photo area size
|
|
|
4353 |
\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area
|
|
|
4354 |
\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area
|
|
|
4355 |
% area cleared for photo
|
|
|
4356 |
\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area
|
|
|
4357 |
\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area
|
|
|
4358 |
% actual depth will be a multiple of
|
|
|
4359 |
% \baselineskip, rounded up
|
|
|
4360 |
\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
|
|
|
4361 |
|
|
|
4362 |
\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
|
|
|
4363 |
\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
|
|
|
4364 |
% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
|
|
|
4365 |
% the nominal value of the spacer
|
|
|
4366 |
% and one extra line for good measure
|
|
|
4367 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
|
|
|
4368 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
|
|
|
4369 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
|
|
|
4370 |
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
|
|
|
4371 |
% with a new one
|
|
|
4372 |
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
|
|
|
4373 |
% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
|
|
|
4374 |
\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
|
|
|
4375 |
% the default box for where the photo goes
|
|
|
4376 |
\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
|
|
|
4377 |
\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
|
|
|
4378 |
%
|
|
|
4379 |
% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
|
|
|
4380 |
% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
|
|
|
4381 |
% and if so, override the default box with what they want
|
|
|
4382 |
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
|
|
|
4383 |
\centering%
|
|
|
4384 |
#1%
|
|
|
4385 |
\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
|
|
|
4386 |
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
|
|
|
4387 |
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
|
|
|
4388 |
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
|
|
|
4389 |
% to the biography, not the previous section
|
|
|
4390 |
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
|
|
|
4391 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
|
|
4392 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
|
|
|
4393 |
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
|
|
|
4394 |
\fi%
|
|
|
4395 |
% one more biography
|
|
|
4396 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
|
|
4397 |
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
|
|
|
4398 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
|
|
|
4399 |
% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
|
|
|
4400 |
% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
|
|
|
4401 |
% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
|
|
|
4402 |
% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
|
|
|
4403 |
\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
|
|
|
4404 |
\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
|
|
|
4405 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
|
|
|
4406 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
|
|
|
4407 |
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
|
|
|
4408 |
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
|
|
|
4409 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
|
|
|
4410 |
% set the hanging indent
|
|
|
4411 |
\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
|
|
|
4412 |
\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
|
|
4413 |
% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
|
|
|
4414 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
|
|
|
4415 |
% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
|
|
|
4416 |
\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
|
|
|
4417 |
\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
|
|
|
4418 |
% now place the author name and begin the bio text
|
|
|
4419 |
\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
|
|
|
4420 |
% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
|
|
|
4421 |
% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
|
|
|
4422 |
% MDS
|
|
|
4423 |
\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
|
|
|
4424 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
|
|
|
4425 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
|
|
|
4426 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
|
|
|
4427 |
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
|
|
4428 |
\noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
|
|
|
4429 |
\fi%
|
|
|
4430 |
\par\normalfont}
|
|
|
4431 |
|
|
|
4432 |
|
|
|
4433 |
|
|
|
4434 |
% V1.6
|
|
|
4435 |
% added biography without a photo environment
|
|
|
4436 |
\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
|
|
|
4437 |
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
|
|
|
4438 |
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
|
|
|
4439 |
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
|
|
|
4440 |
% to the biography, not the previous section
|
|
|
4441 |
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
|
|
|
4442 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
|
|
4443 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
|
|
|
4444 |
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
|
|
|
4445 |
\fi%
|
|
|
4446 |
% one more biography
|
|
|
4447 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
|
|
4448 |
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
|
|
|
4449 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
|
|
|
4450 |
\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
|
|
|
4451 |
\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
|
|
|
4452 |
\parskip=0pt\par%
|
|
|
4453 |
\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
|
|
|
4454 |
|
|
|
4455 |
|
|
|
4456 |
% provide the user with some old font commands
|
|
|
4457 |
% got this from article.cls
|
|
|
4458 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
|
|
|
4459 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
|
|
|
4460 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
|
|
|
4461 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
|
|
|
4462 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
|
|
|
4463 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
|
|
|
4464 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
|
|
|
4465 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
|
|
|
4466 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
|
|
|
4467 |
|
|
|
4468 |
|
|
|
4469 |
% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
|
|
|
4470 |
%
|
|
|
4471 |
% holds the special notice text
|
|
|
4472 |
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
|
|
|
4473 |
|
|
|
4474 |
% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
|
|
|
4475 |
% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
|
|
|
4476 |
\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
|
|
4477 |
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
|
|
|
4478 |
\else%
|
|
|
4479 |
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
|
|
|
4480 |
\fi}
|
|
|
4481 |
|
|
|
4482 |
|
|
|
4483 |
|
|
|
4484 |
|
|
|
4485 |
% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
|
|
|
4486 |
% to insert a publisher's ID footer
|
|
|
4487 |
% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
|
|
|
4488 |
% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
|
|
|
4489 |
% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
|
|
|
4490 |
% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
|
|
|
4491 |
% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author
|
|
|
4492 |
% names and the maintext.
|
|
|
4493 |
%
|
|
|
4494 |
% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
|
|
|
4495 |
% publisher's ID footer
|
|
|
4496 |
% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals,
|
|
|
4497 |
% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
|
|
|
4498 |
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
|
|
|
4499 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
|
|
4500 |
% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
|
|
|
4501 |
% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
|
|
|
4502 |
% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
|
|
|
4503 |
% second column
|
|
|
4504 |
% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
|
|
|
4505 |
% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
|
|
|
4506 |
% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
|
|
|
4507 |
% and call it even.
|
|
|
4508 |
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
|
|
|
4509 |
\fi
|
|
|
4510 |
|
|
|
4511 |
% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
|
|
|
4512 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
|
|
4513 |
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
|
|
|
4514 |
\fi
|
|
|
4515 |
|
|
|
4516 |
% holds the ID text
|
|
|
4517 |
\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
|
|
|
4518 |
|
|
|
4519 |
% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
|
|
|
4520 |
\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
|
|
4521 |
\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
|
|
|
4522 |
% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
|
|
|
4523 |
% V1.6 use before \maketitle
|
|
|
4524 |
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
|
|
|
4525 |
|
|
|
4526 |
|
|
|
4527 |
% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
|
|
|
4528 |
% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
|
|
|
4529 |
% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
|
|
|
4530 |
% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
|
|
|
4531 |
% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
|
|
|
4532 |
% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
|
|
|
4533 |
% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
|
|
|
4534 |
% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
|
|
|
4535 |
% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been
|
|
|
4536 |
% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
|
|
|
4537 |
% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
|
|
|
4538 |
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
|
|
4539 |
\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
4540 |
|
|
|
4541 |
% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
|
|
|
4542 |
% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
|
|
|
4543 |
% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
|
|
|
4544 |
|
|
|
4545 |
|
|
|
4546 |
|
|
|
4547 |
%% Lockout some commands under various conditions
|
|
|
4548 |
|
|
|
4549 |
% general purpose bit bucket
|
|
|
4550 |
\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
|
|
|
4551 |
|
|
|
4552 |
% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
|
|
|
4553 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
|
|
|
4554 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4555 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
|
|
|
4556 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
|
|
|
4557 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
|
|
|
4558 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
|
|
|
4559 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
|
|
|
4560 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
|
|
|
4561 |
\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
|
|
|
4562 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
|
|
|
4563 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
|
|
|
4564 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
|
|
|
4565 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
|
|
|
4566 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
|
|
|
4567 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
|
|
|
4568 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
|
|
|
4569 |
|
|
|
4570 |
|
|
|
4571 |
%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
|
|
|
4572 |
%%
|
|
|
4573 |
% save commands which might be locked out
|
|
|
4574 |
% so that the user can later restore them if needed
|
|
|
4575 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
|
|
|
4576 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4577 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
|
|
|
4578 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
|
|
|
4579 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
|
|
|
4580 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
|
|
|
4581 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
|
|
|
4582 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
|
|
|
4583 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
|
|
|
4584 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
|
|
|
4585 |
|
|
|
4586 |
|
|
|
4587 |
% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
|
|
|
4588 |
% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
|
|
|
4589 |
% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
|
|
|
4590 |
% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
|
|
|
4591 |
% paper.
|
|
|
4592 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
|
|
4593 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4594 |
is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
|
|
4595 |
\fi
|
|
|
4596 |
% and for technotes
|
|
|
4597 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
|
|
4598 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4599 |
is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
|
|
4600 |
\fi
|
|
|
4601 |
|
|
|
4602 |
|
|
|
4603 |
% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
|
|
|
4604 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
|
|
4605 |
% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
|
|
|
4606 |
% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text.
|
|
|
4607 |
% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
|
|
|
4608 |
% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
|
|
|
4609 |
% from filling up with redundant messages
|
|
|
4610 |
\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
|
|
|
4611 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
|
|
|
4612 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
|
|
4613 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
|
|
4614 |
|
|
|
4615 |
|
|
|
4616 |
% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
|
|
|
4617 |
% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname
|
|
|
4618 |
% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
|
|
|
4619 |
% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
|
|
|
4620 |
% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the
|
|
|
4621 |
% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
|
|
|
4622 |
% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
|
|
|
4623 |
% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
|
|
|
4624 |
% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
|
|
|
4625 |
% name can be left undisturbed.
|
|
|
4626 |
\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
|
|
|
4627 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
|
|
|
4628 |
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
|
|
|
4629 |
% and make biography point to our bogus biography
|
|
|
4630 |
\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
|
|
|
4631 |
\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
|
|
|
4632 |
|
|
|
4633 |
\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
|
|
|
4634 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
|
|
|
4635 |
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
|
|
|
4636 |
|
|
|
4637 |
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid
|
|
|
4638 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
|
|
|
4639 |
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
|
|
|
4640 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
|
|
|
4641 |
\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
|
|
|
4642 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
|
|
|
4643 |
\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
|
|
|
4644 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
|
|
|
4645 |
\fi
|
|
|
4646 |
|
|
|
4647 |
|
|
|
4648 |
% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
|
|
|
4649 |
\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
|
|
|
4650 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
|
|
|
4651 |
\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
|
|
|
4652 |
\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
|
|
|
4653 |
\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
|
|
|
4654 |
\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
|
|
|
4655 |
\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
|
|
|
4656 |
\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
|
|
|
4657 |
\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
|
|
|
4658 |
\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
|
|
|
4659 |
\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
|
|
|
4660 |
\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
|
|
|
4661 |
|
|
|
4662 |
|
|
|
4663 |
|
|
|
4664 |
% need a backslash character for typeout output
|
|
|
4665 |
{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
|
|
|
4666 |
|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
|
|
|
4667 |
|
|
|
4668 |
|
|
|
4669 |
% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
|
|
|
4670 |
\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
|
|
|
4671 |
Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
|
|
|
4672 |
|
|
|
4673 |
|
|
|
4674 |
% provide for legacy commands
|
|
|
4675 |
\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
|
|
|
4676 |
\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
|
|
|
4677 |
\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
|
|
|
4678 |
\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
|
|
|
4679 |
\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
|
|
|
4680 |
\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
|
|
|
4681 |
\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
|
|
|
4682 |
\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
|
|
|
4683 |
\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
|
|
|
4684 |
\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
|
|
|
4685 |
|
|
|
4686 |
|
|
|
4687 |
|
|
|
4688 |
% provide for legacy environments
|
|
|
4689 |
\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
|
|
|
4690 |
\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
|
|
|
4691 |
\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
|
|
|
4692 |
\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
|
|
|
4693 |
\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
|
|
|
4694 |
\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
|
|
|
4695 |
|
|
|
4696 |
|
|
|
4697 |
% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible
|
|
|
4698 |
\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
|
|
|
4699 |
\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
|
|
|
4700 |
\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
|
|
|
4701 |
\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
|
|
|
4702 |
\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
|
|
|
4703 |
\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
|
|
|
4704 |
\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
|
|
|
4705 |
|
|
|
4706 |
|
|
|
4707 |
|
|
|
4708 |
% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded
|
|
|
4709 |
% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof
|
|
|
4710 |
\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
|
|
|
4711 |
|
|
|
4712 |
% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.
|
|
|
4713 |
\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
|
|
|
4714 |
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
|
|
|
4715 |
\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
|
|
|
4716 |
|
|
|
4717 |
|
|
|
4718 |
\endinput
|
|
|
4719 |
|
|
|
4720 |
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
|
|
4721 |
% That's all folks!
|
|
|
4722 |
|